Workforce Management Suite. User's Manual

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Workforce Management Suite. User's Manual"

Transcription

1 Workforce Management Suite User's Manual

2 TruTime User s Guide Version 6.00 for use with Microsoft Windows COPYRIGHT 2003 Amano Cincinnati, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Amano Cincinnati, Incorporated. SOFTWARE LICENSE NOTICE Your license agreement with Amano Cincinnati, Incorporated, which is included with the product, specifies the permitted and prohibited uses of the product. Any unauthorized duplication or use of Trutime 5.00, in whole or in part, in print, or in any other storage and retrieval system is prohibited. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS and paragraph (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights at FAR Subcontractor/Manufacturer is Amano Cincinnati, Incorporated, 140 Harrison Avenue, Roseland, New Jersey LICENSES AND TRADEMARKS TruTime, AMX/ABX-10, MJR-8150, MTX-10/20 and TC-500 are registered trademarks of Amano Cincinnati, Inc. Windows, MS-DOS, Excel and MS Access are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Btrieve is a registered trademark of Btrieve Technologies, Inc. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation < This product includes itext software Copyright 1999, 2000, 2001 by Bruno Lowagie,Adolf Baeyensstraat 121, 9040 Gent, BELGIUM < subject to LGPL or MPL agreements included on the TruTime software CD. This product includes code licensed from RSA Security, Inc. Some portions licensed from IBM are available at < All other trademark names used in this documentation are the sole property of their respective owners. TRUTIME AND MICROSOFT WINDOWS TruTime operates in a Microsoft Windows environment, created by Microsoft Corporation. An extension of the MS- DOS operating system, Microsoft Windows gives a standard look and feel to TruTime and all other Windows applications. To run TruTime under Microsoft Windows, you need to license and install Microsoft Windows. Amano Cincinnati, Inc. reserves the right to make software changes and improvements which may not be reflected in this document.

3 Table of Contents Chapter 1: Introduction Before You Begin About Your TruTime Users Manual Add-On Module Documentation System Requirements Installing TruTime Chapter 2: TruTime Basic Setup Cost Center Department Job Class Pay Code Pay Class Basic Item Tab Time Rounding Tab Over Time Tab Holiday Tab System Configuration Chapter 3: Schedule Setup Zone Differential Advanced Award Rules Examples Advanced Zone Qualification Examples Break/Lunch Template Schedule Auto Schedule Individual Schedule Schedule Rotation Advance Schedule Standby Schedule Lockin Schedule TruScheduler Chapter 4: Employee Setup Basic Info Tab Auto Schedule Tab Benefit Time Tab Non-TruAccruals TruAccruals Validation Tab User Defined Fields Tab Data Entry User Defined Expression Filter Wages/Rates Tab Accumulated Tips Tab Chapter 5: TruTime Access Access Level System Access Table of Contents / TRUTIME i

4 Chapter 6: Working in TruTime Edit Daily Data Punch Data Tab Accumulated Hours Tab Hours Adjustment Tab Edit Undefined Data Global Edit Daily Data Recalculate Hours Chapter 7: TruTime Reports Time Distribution Report Standard TruTime Reports Time Card Report Attendance Report Exception Report Tardy Report Absence Report Manpower Report Schedule Vs. Actual Report Cost Center Analysis Report Department Analysis Report Job Class Analysis Report Zone Analysis Report Threshold Report Accumulation Report Audit Trail Report Historical Exception Report Labor Analysis Report Tips Report Access Control Report Schedule Posting Report On-Premise Report Chapter 8: TruTime Communications MTX Manual Polling/Download Location Setup Tab Terminal Setup Tab Relay Setup Tab Terminal Programming Tab Polling Tab Download Tab Clock Maintenance Terminal Screen Tab Set/Edit Terminal Settings Tab Group Set/Add Tab Group Delete Polling Downloading Non-ACI Terminals Polling/Downloading Locations Tab Relays Tab Terminals Tab Assignments Tab Download Tab Polling Tab Employee Terminal Information ii Table of Contents / TRUTIME

5 Terminal Message Logging Auto Processing MTX Auto Polling/Download Schedule Non-ACI Polling/Download Schedule Auto Report Setup Backup Schedule Chapter 9: Payroll Interfaces Payroll Company and Payroll File Name Payroll Field ID Code Payroll ID Number Payroll Interface Chapter 10: TruTime Backup Backup Restore Merge Archive Chapter 11: TruTime Utility Compacting the Database for Resetting the Number of Clients Inserting Other Programs Into TruTime Menus Calculating MTX Memory Usage Glossary G Table of Contents / TRUTIME iii

6 Chapter 1: Introduction Welcome to TruTime for Windows Time and Attendance Software. TruTime is compatible with Windows 95, 98, NT and Me. TruTime allows you to create a direct link between your time and attendance collection terminals and your PC. Within TruTime you will be able to track employees worked and nonworked hours, create reports to optimize your staffing resources, and interface directly to a number of payroll software packages. TruTime is designed for ease of use and maximum flexibility. TruTime can automatically calculate employee hours and prepare information for your payroll service or in-house payroll software package within a fraction of the time it would take to prepare manually. In addition, it provides you with valuable attendance data which will assist you in employee scheduling, performance appraisals, maintaining legal compliance, and much more. TruTime uses Microsoft s industry standard Graphical User Interface (GUI) to provide you with a seamless information presentation and ease of use. In addition, you ll be able to share data using Open Database Connectivity (ODBC). Before You Begin If you haven t already done so, we recommend that you take a moment now to fill out your TruTime registration card located in the inside cover of this binder. Once completed, the card can be faxed or mailed to TruTime Support to complete the registration process. Having purchased TruTime, you are entitled to receive 45 days of free technical support from your TruTime representative. Please refer to the TruTime Support and Documentation tab of this binder for detailed information about your technical support. About the TruTime Manual Each chapter in this manual refers to a specific TruTime functionality. Each chapter begins with an overview of the function and is then divided into separate sections. Each section refers to a specific program feature, and begins with an overview introducing terms and concepts, followed by step-by-step instructions. If you are new to Time and Attendance software, we recommend you read through this manual and the rest of the materials included in your TruTime binder to become familiar with our product and it s many uses. The more familiar you become, the more you will be able to take advantage of all the features contained within TruTime. This manual is organized into the following chapters: Chapter 1: Introduction This chapter contains a brief overview of TruTime and the User s Manual. Chapter 2: TruTime Basic Setup This chapter introduces and explains how to set up the foundation of your TruTime system including the creation of Cost Centers, Departments, Job Classes, Pay Codes, Pay Classes and the settings contained in System Configuration. Chapter 3: Schedule Setup This chapter explains types of schedules available in TruTime, how to create and edit schedules for individuals or groups of employees, and their associated modules, such as Zone Differentials and Auto Break. Chapter 4: Employee Setup This chapter explains how to add and modify employee records in TruTime using the Employee Maintenance module which is also referred to as the Employee Master file. TRUTIME / Introduction 1-1

7 Chapter 5: TruTime Access This chapter explains how to add and modify user profiles and define up to 9 distinct access levels. Each person using TruTime must have an assigned profile for security and access purposes. Chapter 6: Working in TruTime This chapter explains how to work with the data contained in the TruTime including: Editing Undefined Data, Edit Daily Data, Global Edit Daily Data and Recalculating Hours. Chapter 7: TruTime Reports This chapter provides an overview of the twenty-one reports contained in TruTime and explains how to set Sort and Range options. Once created reports can be displayed to screen, sent to a system printer, or saved to a file. Chapter 8: TruTime Communications This chapter explains how to configure your data collection terminal(s) for use with TruTime. It also instructs you in the use and operation of TruTime s Auto Process feature. This feature enables you to poll and download to your data collection terminal(s), and perform database backups automatically according to a predefined schedule. Chapter 9: Payroll Interfaces This chapter explains how to setup TruTime so that data can be used to interface with an outside payroll service or internal payroll software system. Chapter 10: TruTime Backup This chapter discusses the use and operation of TruTime s Backup module. This module is separate from the main program and can be used to backup, restore, merge, archive, or unarchive the TruTime database. TruTime must be closed before entering this module. Chapter 11: TruTime Utility This chapter covers the use and operation of the TruTime Utility. This utility is separate from the main program and is used for upgrading to TruTime Version 6.0 from previous versions, compacting the database, resetting the number of users, inserting other applications into TruTime menus, and calculating and viewing MTX data collection terminal memory usage. Glossary The Glossary contains definitions of words and phrases used throughout TruTime. 1-2 TRUTIME / Introduction

8 Add-On Module Documentation A number of Add-On modules are available for Trutime 6.0. Documention for the following add-on modules are included on the Trutime 6.0 CD: TruAccruals ATT pdf This application will create custom rules for awarding, tracking and reporting employee benefit time. PC Punch ATT pdf Allows employees to Punch In at their workstations. MobilePunch ATT pdf Allows employees to record punches at a Palm device. Btrieve File Manager ATT pdf The Btrieve File Manager is used to correct Input/Export (I/O) errors. TruTime Quick Reference Tips ATT pdf This application contains Trutime Quick Reference Tips to assist you in the use of Trutime. Fone Punch ATT pdf An add-on software package with dedicated hardware that allows users to punch-in via telephone. This information can be exported into Trutime for processing. NetPunch Supervisor ATT pdf An add-on package that provides a web interface for Trutime. NetPunch Employee ATT pdf This application allows employees to punch from a standard web browser. TRUTIME / Introduction 1-3

9 System Requirements Typical Network Installation 1-4 TRUTIME / Introduction

10 Typical Network Installation Using SQL TRUTIME / Introduction 1-5

11 Trutime Workgroup Peer to Peer 1-6 TRUTIME / Introduction

12 Typical Netpunch Installation TRUTIME / Introduction 1-7

13 Advanced Netpunch Installation 1-8 TRUTIME / Introduction

14 Installing TruTime 6.0 There are a number of different configurations that can be used when installing TruTime therefore it is recommended that you contact your TruTime representative before installing any portion of the software. The following are general guidelines that can be followed once your situation has been discussed. Getting Started 1. Place the TruTime CD in the appropriate drive. The installation should automatically launch and the Welcome to TruTime Installation dialog will appear. If your PC is not set to autorun your CD-ROM drive, you will have to type in Setup.exe in the Run command of the Start menu. 2. Select the part(s) of TruTime (TruTime Server, TruTime Client, PC Punch for Windows, TruTime Utility) to be installed on or from this PC. Depending on the type of install you are doing the following is recommended: 3. Stand-alone PC: install the TruTime Server, TruTime Client, and TruTime Utility. Network PC: Install the TruTime Server to the designated drive and the TruTime Client and TruTime Utility to each Client PC accessing TruTime. 4. PC Punch: This add on feature should be installed on every PC using this option to record punches. Click Next to continue or Cancel to stop the TruTime installation.if you are installing more than one part of TruTime there will be a slight delay before the next part is launched. Once all parts of TruTime are installed, the Setup Complete message will appear. It is recommended to select YES, I want to restart my computer now and Finish to complete your installation. 5. If you select Cancel or No at any time during the installation process the Exit Setup dialog will appear. Select Resume to continue the installation or Exit Setup to stop. 6. Install the latest available update (patch). Installing the Server Portion of TruTime These steps can be performed from a client PC or directly at the server. As with any network installation be sure that you have full rights/privileges before beginning. 1. Place the TruTime CD in the appropriate drive. The installation should automatically launch and the Welcome to TruTime Installation dialog will appear. 2. Select Next to continue. 3. The Software License Agreement will be displayed. 4. Select Yes to continue. 5. The User Profile dialog will appear. The Name, Company, and Serial Number fields must be filled in before clicking Next to continue. 6. The Choose TruTime Installation Location dialog will appear. The default destination folder C:\ APPS\ TruTime. To change this location click Browse, enter the desired directory and folder (Except T:\ Apps\ Trutime), and click Next to continue. 1-9 TRUTIME / Introduction

15 7. The Setup Type dialog will appear. Select the type of setup you require and Next to continue. Your options are: Compact: TruTime will be installed without a database. (No BTR or DDF files will be installed.) Custom: Recommended for advance users only. Typical: TruTime will be installed with all options. (Recommended for most users.) Upgrade: TruTime will be installed with only the BTR files that are different from the previous version. (Recommended for users upgrading from a previous version of TruTime.) 8. The Select Program Folder dialog will appear, TruTime for Windows is the default, click Next to continue. 9. The Setup Complete message will appear. Click Finish to proceed. 10. Another Question dialog will appear asking "Would you like MTX Auto Polling/Downloading module put into the startup group?". This in entirely up to the user but is only applicable on the polling PC. 11. The Setup Complete dialog will appear, click Finish to proceed. Installing the Utility Part of TruTime This module should be installed on all PCs using TruTime. 1. The Welcome to TruTime dialog will appear. Click Next to continue. 2. The Software License Agreement will appear. Click Yes to continue. 3. The Choose TruTime Installation Location dialog will appear. The default destination folder C:\ TruTime\ TTUtil. To change this location click Browse, enter the desired directory and folder, and click Next to continue. 4. The Setup Type dialog will appear, this dialog will allow TruTime to use the 32 bit Btrieve drivers if they have been installed on the PC by another Btrieve program. Select the setup you are using and click Next to continue. 5. The Select Program Folder dialog will appear, TruTime for Windows is the default, and click Next to continue. 6. The Setup Complete dialog will appear, and click Finish to proceed. 7. The Select Program Folder dialog will appear, TruTime for Windows is the default, click Next to continue. 8. Another dialog will appear asking "Would you like PC Punch Module put in the Startup Group?". Click Yes or No. 9. The Setup Complete dialog will appear, click Finish to proceed TRUTIME / Introduction

16 Chapter 2: TruTime Basic Setup Cost Centers, Job Classes, Departments, Pay Codes, Pay Classes and System Configuration are the modules used to create the foundation of your TruTime system. These modules are explained below and will determine how employee hours are allocated, sorted and displayed in reports. Pay Classes, Cost Centers, and Departments are also mandatory fields when adding employees in the Employee Master module. This Chapter Includes: Cost Center: Used for categorizing and distributing employee labor hours for accounting/payroll functions and as a criteria for sorting reports. An example of a Cost Center would be a location site, such as Building 1. TruTime allows you to create up to 3000 Cost Centers. Department: Used for categorizing and distributing employee labor hours for accounting/payroll functions and as a criteria for sorting reports. Maintenance would be an example of a Department name. TruTime allows you to create up to 3000 Departments. Job Class: Used for categorizing and distributing employee labor hours for accounting/payroll functions and as a criteria for reports. This module also allows you to assign a Base Rate and Type to be used in the Wage/Rates tab of the Employee Master module. An example of a Job Class would be a Mechanic Level 3. TruTime allows you to create up to 3000 Job Classes. Pay Codes: Used by TruTime to categorize and track an employees worked hours, non-worked hours and dollar amounts. An example of a worked Pay Code would be Regular, a non-worked Pay Code would be Vacation and a dollar Pay Code would be Bonus. TruTime allows you to create up to 75 Pay Codes. Pay Class: Used by TruTime to categorize employees based on specific pay policies, Pay Classes allow you to create rules for allocation of an employees time based on Rounding, OverTime, and Holiday settings. An example of a Pay Class would be the FullTime. TruTime allows you to create up to 300 Pay Classes. System Configuration: Used by TruTime to determine how information will be seen and used throughout the system. This module also allows you select the Payroll Interface software and its file location as described in Chapter 9: Payroll Interfaces. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-1

17 Cost Center This Section Describes How To: Add a Cost Center Delete a Cost Center Modify a Cost Center Name or Abbreviation Exit and Save Print a Cost Center List Cost Centers are used for categorizing and distributing employee labor hours for accounting/payroll functions and as a sorting criteria for reports. An example of a Cost Center may be Building 1 in a multifacility corporation or a product division such as TruTime within a company. Cost Centers are created in the Cost Center window, which is accessed by clicking on the Cost Center icon located under the File Maintenance tab. 2-2 TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

18 Adding a Cost Center: To add a Cost Center, perform the following steps: 1. Select the Cost Center icon located under the File Maintenance tab to open the module. 2. From the Edit menu click the Add Cost Center command or click on the Add Cost Center button on the toolbar. The following dialog box will appear: 3. All fields in this module are mandatory and must be completed. When possible it is recommended that you avoid using spaces in these fields. A description of these fields follows: Code: Enter a Code for your Cost Center. The maximum length of this field is nine alphanumeric characters. When performing Cost Center transfers at either the MTX-20 or Non-ACI terminals, the Cost Center Code must be numeric. Name: Enter a name for your Cost Center. The maximum length of this field is thirty alphanumeric characters. Abbreviation: Enter an abbreviation for your Cost Center. The maximum length of this field is ten alphanumeric characters and will be displayed on all TruTime Reports. 4. Once all information has been entered click the OK button or press the Enter key. The information entered will appear in the Cost Center window displayed below: 5. Click the disk icon to save your Cost Center. Select the x in the upper right hand corner to close the module. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-3

19 Deleting a Cost Center: To delete a Cost Center, perform the following steps: 1. Remove that Cost Center from all employees in the Employee Master module. 2. Open the Cost Center module located under the File Maintenance tab. 3. Select the Cost Center to be deleted. This is done by highlighting any of the three fields contained in the record. 4. From the Edit menu select the Delete Cost Center command or click the Delete Cost Center button on the toolbar. 5. A confirmation dialog will appear. Click on OK or Cancel to return to the Cost Center window. 6. Save setting before exiting module. If TruTime locates an employee assigned to the Cost Center being deleted the following message box will be displayed: Note the name of the employee and select OK. Before TruTime will allow you to delete the Cost Center, you must reassign the employee to a different Cost Center. This is done in the Employee Master module. Modifying a Cost Center Name or Abbreviation: To modify a Cost Center Name or Abbreviation, perform the following steps: 1. Click on the Cost Center Name or Abbreviation field to be modified. 2. Type in the new Cost Center Name or Abbreviation and press the Enter key. 3. Save settings before exiting module. Exiting and Saving: Added, deleted or modified Cost Center information must be saved before exiting the module. To do so, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button. To exit the Cost Center window, select the Exit command in the File menu or click the X in the upper right-hand corner of the window. Printing a Cost Center List: To print a Cost Center List, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button on the toolbar. Your Cost Centers list will be sent to your system s printer. To change the printer settings, select the Print Setup command from the File menu. 2-4 TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

20 Department This Section Describes How To: Add a Department Delete a Department Modify a Department Name and Abbreviation Exit and Save Print a Department List Departments are used for categorizing and distributing employee hours for accounting/payroll functions and as a sorting criteria for reports. An example of a Department would be Maintenance in a multifacility corporation or a service division such as Software Support within a company. Departments are created in the Department window, which is accessed by clicking on the Department icon located under the File Maintenance tab. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-5

21 Adding a Department: To add a Department, perform the following steps: 1. Select the Department icon located under the File Maintenance tab to open the module. 2. From the Edit menu click the Add Department command or click on the Add Department button on the toolbar. The following dialog box will appear: 3. All fields in this module are mandatory and must be completed. When possible it is recommended that you avoid using spaces in these fields. A description of these fields follows: Code: Enter a Code for your Department. The maximum length of this field is ten alphanumeric characters. When performing Department transfers at either the MTX-20 or Non-ACI terminals, the Department Code must be numeric. Name: Enter a name for your Department. The maximum length of this field is thirty alphanumeric characters. Abbreviation: Enter an abbreviation for your Department. The maximum length of this field is ten alphanumeric characters and will be displayed on all TruTime reports. 4. Once all information has been entered click the OK button or press the Enter key. The information entered will appear in the Department window displayed below: 5. Click the disk icon to save your Departments. Select the x in the upper right hand corner to close the module. 2-6 TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

22 Deleting a Department: To delete a Department, perform the following steps: 1. Remove that Department from all employees in the Employee Master module. 2. Open the Department module located under the File Maintenance tab. 3. Select the Department to be deleted. This is done by highlighting any of the three fields contained in the record. 4. From the Edit menu select the Delete Department command or click the Delete Department button on the toolbar. 5. A confirmation dialog will appear. Click on OK or Cancel to return to the Department window. 6. Save settings before exiting module. If TruTime locates an employee assigned to the Department being deleted the following message box will be displayed: Note the name of the employee and select OK. Before TruTime will allow you to delete the Department you must reassign the employee to a different Department. This is done in the Employee Master module. Modifying a Department Name or Abbreviation: To modify a Department Name or Abbreviation perform the following steps: 1. Click on the Department Name or Abbreviation field to be modified. 2. Type in the new Department Name or Abbreviation and press the Enter key. 3. Save settings before exiting module. Exiting and Saving: Department information added or modified must be saved before exiting the module. To do so, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button on the toolbar. To exit the Department window, select the Exit command in the File menu or click the X in the upper right-hand corner. Printing a Department List: To print a Department List select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button on the toolbar. Your Department list will be sent to your system s printer. To change the printer settings, select the Print Setup command from the File menu. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-7

23 Job Class This Section Describes How To: Add a Job Class Delete a Job Class Modify a Job Class Name or Abbreviation Exit and Save Print a Job Class List Job Classes are used for categorizing and distributing employee labor hours for accounting/payroll functions and as a sorting criteria for reports. This module also allows you to assign a Base Rate and Type to be used in the Wage/Rates tab of the Employee Master module to calculate employee wages. An example of a Job Class would be a Mechanic Level 3. Job Classes are created in the Job Class window, which is accessed by clicking on the Job Class icon located under the File Maintenance tab. 2-8 TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

24 Adding a Job Class: To add a Job Class, perform the following steps: 1. Select the Job Class icon located under the File Maintenance tab to open the module. 2. From the Edit menu click the Add Job Class command or click on the Add Job Class button on the toolbar. The following dialog box will appear: 3. The Code, Name, and Abbreviation fields are mandatory when creating a Job Class. Base Rate and Type are optional fields that have been defaulted to 0.00 and Flat Rate, respectively. When possible it is recommended that you avoid using spaces in the mandatory fields. A description of these fields follows: Code: Enter a Code for your Job Class. The maximum length of this field is nine alphanumeric characters. When performing Job Class transfers at either the MTX-20 or Non-ACI terminals, the Job Class Code must be numeric. Name: Enter a name for your Job Class. The maximum length of this field is thirty alphanumeric characters. Abbreviation: Enter an abbreviation for your Job Class. The maximum length of this field is ten alphanumeric characters and will be displayed on all TruTime reports. Base Rate: This field works hand-in-hand with Base Rate Type located in the lower right hand corner of the screen and is explained in the definitions below. These fields are used in conjunction with the Wage/Rate tab of the Employee Master to calculate employee wages. Your choices are: Percentage: When Highest Rate or Highest Rate Tracking is selected in the Wage/Rate tab of the Employee Master module, the percentage entered in Base Rate will be added to the employee s rate. For example: If TruTime determines the Highest Rate to be $5.00 and the Job Class has Percentage selected with a Base Rate of (10%), TruTime will calculate the hourly rate to be $5.50. Flat Rate: When Job Rate Only is selected in the Wage/Rate tab of the Employee Master module, the Flat Rate entered in Base Rate will be the rate assigned to the employee. If Highest Rate or Highest Rate Tracking is selected, TruTime will compare the rates entered in Wage/Rate tab of the Employee Master to those entered in the Base Rate and take the highest of the two. For example: If TruTime determines the rate in Wage/Rate to be $5.00 and the amount entered in Base Rate is $10.00, TruTime would calculate the hourly rate to be $ Add to: When Highest Rate or Highest Rate Tracking is selected in the Wage/Rate tab of the Employee Master module, the amount entered in Base Rate will be added to the employee s rate. For example: If TruTime determines the Highest Rate to be $5.00 and the Job Class has Add To selected with a Base Rate of.50 TruTime will add fifty cents and calculate the hourly rate to be $5.50. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-9

25 4. Once all information has been entered, click the OK button or press the Enter key. The information entered will appear in the Job Class window displayed below: 5. Click the disk icon to save your Job Classes. Select the x in the upper right hand corner to close the module. Deleting a Job Class: To delete a Job Class perform the following steps: 1. Remove the Job Class from all employees in the Employee Master module. 2. Open the Job Class module located under the File Maintenance tab. 3. Select the Job Class to be deleted. This is done by highlighting any of the five fields contained in the record. 4. From the Edit menu select the Delete Job Class command or click the Delete Job Class button on the toolbar. 5. A confirmation dialog will appear. Click on OK or Cancel to return to the Job Class window. 6. Save settings before exiting module. If TruTime locates an employee assigned to the Job Class being deleted, the following message box will be displayed: Note the name of the employee and select OK. Before TruTime will allow you to delete the Job Class, you must reassign the employee to a different Job Class. This is done in the Employee Master module TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

26 Modifying a Job Class Name or Abbreviation: To modify a Job Class name, perform the following steps: 1. Click on the Job Class Name field that you want to modify. The Job Class Name will be highlighted and will also appear in the drop down list in the tool bar. 2. Type in the new Job Class Name and press the Enter key. 3. Save settings before exiting module. Exiting and Saving: Any Job Class information added or modified must be saved before exiting. To do so, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button. To exit the Job Class window, select the Exit command in the File menu. Printing a Job Class List: To print a Job Class List select the Print command from the File menu, or click on the Print button on the toolbar. Your Job Classes list will be sent to your system s printer. To change the printer settings, select the Print Setup command from the File menu. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-11

27 Pay Code This Section Describes: What Pay Codes are The Fields and Layout of the Pay Code Module How to Create a Pay Code How to Delete a Pay Code How to Modify an Existing Pay Code How to Exit and Save How to Print a Pay Code List Pay Codes are used by TruTime to categorize and track employees worked hours, non-worked hours and dollar amounts. These codes are displayed in the Hours Adjustment tab of Edit Daily Data, the TruAccruals module and in a number of TruTime Reports. Pay Codes can also be exported to a payroll export file when a Payroll Field ID is entered. As seen below the Pay Code module consists of over 20 fields. Numbers one through six have been placed next to the main sections of this module. These numbers are used as reference points only and do not appear in the actual module. The six sections of the Pay Code module are: Pay Code, Type, Automatic Pay, Qualifiers, Overtime, and Payroll Field ID TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

28 The mandatory fields for this module are: Code, Order No., Abbreviation, Description, Key In Pay, Code No., and Type. All other fields are optional and used to determine how TruTime will allocate and apply hours assigned to the Pay Code. A description of each field follows: Pay Code Code: Up to three alphanumeric characters may be used to define each Pay Code. Example codes are REG (Regular), OT (Overtime), VAC (Vacation), SIC (Sick), BON (Bonus), and TIP (Tip). Order No.: This setting determines the order in which the Pay Codes are displayed in the drop-down menus and on printed Pay Code lists. The number enter can be between 1 and 99, however, numbers can not be repeated. This setting has no effect on the TruTime calculations. Abbreviation: This field is mandatory and used for display purposes only. It can be a maximum of 10 characters long. Description: This field is mandatory and used for display purposes only. It can be a maximum of 30 characters long. Key In Pay Code No.: This setting relates a specific Pay Code to a numeric value so that if necessary, employee adjustments can be made at the terminal. This feature is only supported by the TC-500, MTX- 20, Hand Punch, HandPunch 3000 and 4000, CMI 1600, and Kronos 400 terminals and is necessary because these terminals do not have alphabet keys. This field is mandatory and defaulted to 999, however, any value from 1 through 999 may be used. Type This setting defines how the hours awarded to a specific Pay Code will be classified. Type has nothing to do with the calculation of hours worked; rather TruTime uses the type of Pay Code to determine if an employee should be considered an absence. Your choices are: Worked hours: Hours physically worked. (Example: REG, OT) Non-worked hours: Hours not physically worked. (Example: SIC, VAC) Dollars: Monetary amounts given to an employee. (Example: Bonus, Tip) Automatic Pay When selected, this feature activates the Pay Code to automatically generate hours for an employee on days they will not be punching in and are assigned an Advanced, Individual or TruSchedule schedule. This feature is used primarily with Non-worked Pay Codes such as Sick and Vacation. Number of Hours: Using Individual Schedules, Trutime automatically pays the entered number of hours in this field without the need for the employee to punch in. This field can also be used to enter a value when the Minimum Hours option is selected. The default setting is 00:00. Number of Hours has no effect on the other schedules such as the Holiday Schedule in pay class, Advance Schedule, TruSchedule, and Standby Schedule. The If work on an automatic day statement provides two options for instances when an employee punches in on a day that they are scheduled to receive Automatic Pay such as a Holiday. Your choices are: Work Code Only: The employees hours will only be calculated for the amount of hours they actually worked. Auto Pay + Work Code: The employee will be paid for the hours they actually work, plus the number of hours assigned for the Automatic Pay day. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-13

29 Minimum Hours: When an employee assigned to this Pay Code punches in they will receive a minimum of the number of hours entered in the Number or Hours field for that day. For example, if the number entered in the Number of Hours field is 4 and the employee works only 2 hours, the employee will receive 4 hours for the day. If the employee punches in and works 6 hours they will receive 6 hours for the day. The Work day before/day after qualifier can only be applied to an employee who has an assigned schedule such as Auto Schedule, TruSchedule,or Individual Schedule. If a default/schedule/lunch/break is assigned in the pay class and employee master modules, qualifiers will not work properly because a default/schedule/lunch/break is not considered a schedule. Qualifiers are most commonly used when company rules require an employee to work their schedules day before, day after or both before receiving an Automatic Pay Code such as a Holiday. When the Work day before box is selected, TruTime will confirm that the employee has worked their last scheduled day before the date of the holiday before awarding Automatic Pay hours. When the Work day after box is selected, TruTime will confirm that the employee has worked the first day scheduled after the holiday before awarding Automatic Pay hours. When both boxes are selected, the employee will be required to work their scheduled day before and day after before Automatic Pay hours are awarded. When Counts toward day before / day after is selected the Pay Code will count toward the day before / day after qualifier as see in the examples below: Work day before 1. Holiday: Monday 2. Schedule: Monday thru Friday In this case, TruTime checks to see whether the employee worked on Friday or not. If they did work or the Pay Code assigned for that day counts toward day before / day after, they will receive the Automatic Pay hours for Monday. Work day after 1. Holiday: Monday 2. Schedule: Monday thru Friday In this case, TruTime checks to see whether the employee worked on Tuesday or not. If they did work or the Pay Code assigned for that day counts toward day before / day after, they will receive the Automatic Pay hours for Monday. Work day before and Work day after 1. Holiday: Monday 2. Schedule Monday thru Friday In this case, TruTime checks to see whether or not the employee worked on both Friday and Tuesday. If they did work or the Pay Code assigned for that days counts toward day before / day after, they will receive the Automatic Pay hours for Monday. If they did work on Friday but not Tuesday, or worked Tuesday but not Friday they would not get Automatic Pay hours for Monday. Counts toward day before / day after 1. Holiday: Monday 2. Schedule: Monday thru Friday 3. Tuesday is a Vacation and Vacation does not have Counts toward day before / day after selected. In this case, TruTime checks to see whether or not the employee worked on Tuesday and finds that it is a scheduled Vacation day. It then checks to see if Vacation counts toward day before /day after. Since it does not count, the qualifier is not met and no Automatic Pay hours are awarded for Monday TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

30 Counts toward day before / day after 1. Holiday: Monday 2. Schedule: Monday thru Friday 3. Tuesday is a Vacation day and Vacation has Counts toward day before / day after selected. In this case, TruTime checks to see whether or not the employee worked on Tuesday and finds that it is a scheduled Vacation day. It then checks to see if Vacation counts toward day before / day after. Since it does count, the qualifier is met and Automatic Pay hours are awarded for Monday. Qualifiers Count Toward Weekly Overtime Calculation: When selected, TruTime will count hours awarded in this Pay Code towards the weekly overtime requirements, as set in the OverTime section of the Pay Class module. When the Count Toward Weekly Overtime Calculation check box is selected, the Overtime Level field must be filled in. Split Hours:This box is only selected when you want TruTime to be able to take hours from the Pay Code and apply them to another Pay Code, such as overtime, when set criteria is met. If you do not want hours such as Vacation awarded to a different Pay Code, this box should not be checked. When awarding Overtime, at least one Pay Code must have Split Hours checked, this is normally the REG Pay Code. Example: Vacation hours count towards weekly overtime, but you do not want to split vacation hours to overtime. TruTime splits ten hours of Regular on Thursday to 8 hours Regular and 2 hours Overtime, because the VAC Pay Code setting is not checked to Split Hours. If split had been selected for VAC, TruTime would have taken time away from vacation to meet the Overtime criteria as seen below: TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-15

31 TruTime calculation procedures: 1. Check the accumulated hours for weekly OT exceeding weekly overtime criteria (e.g. 40 hours). 2. Once the accumulated hours exceed the criteria, TruTime checks the Split Hours check box of the primary Pay Code for that day (exceeding criteria) to see if it is selected or not. 3. If the Pay Code has Split Hours checked, TruTime takes the needed hours from that Pay Code and applies them to overtime. 4. If the Pay Code for that day does not have Split Hours checked, TruTime checks the prior days Pay Code to see whether the Split Hour box is checked or not. Once a split Pay Code is found, TruTime takes the needed hours from the Pay Code and applies them to overtime. Count Toward Consecutive Day Calculation: This box is selected when TruTime is to count hours awarded in this Pay Code towards the Consecutive Day Rule, as defined in the OverTime section of the Pay Class module. Overtime Levels Overtime Levels:These settings are used two ways, the first is to set the number of hours an employee must work in a day before overtime is awarded. The second is used as a pointer for the weekly overtime as defined in the Overtime section of the Pay Class module. Three different overtime levels can be set depending on your company rules. Daily OT Level: The employee must work the number of hours entered in Daily OT Level (including zero) before receiving the Overtime Pay Code. Pay Code: The Pay Code entered in this field is the Pay Code that will be used to award an employees hours that meet or exceed the Daily OT Level. This is also the code that will be used for Weekly OT Hours. For example, if Daily OT Level 1 is set to 08:00 and the Pay Code set to OT then an employee who worked 10 hours in a day would be given 8 hours of REG and 2 hours of OT. Payroll Field ID Payroll Field ID: This field assigns a Payroll Field ID to a specific Pay Code, allowing a payroll service to identify the Pay Code when a payroll export file is created. These ID s are assigned by individual Payroll Companies. Please refer to the Chapter 9: Payroll Interfaces for more information on this process. Hour Type Multiplier: This field is used when wages are being calculated. TruTime will determine an employee s wages by using their rate multiplied by the value entered in this field. If zero is entered in the Hour Type Multiplier box, TruTime will not calculate wages for that Pay Code. Examples: REG is set to 1, OT is set to 1.5, DT is set to 2 etc. Hour Category: This field groups Pay Codes into five categories. The first three categories, MSC (Miscellaneous), OT (Overtime) and REG (Regular) can be used to download hours to the MTX-20 and some HandPunch terminals so that employee hours can be viewed at the terminal, (multiple Pay Codes can be assign to the same category). The other two categories, TTL and OT2 are used in conjunction with Advanced Zone Differential settings TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

32 Adding a Pay Code: To add a Pay Code, perform the following steps: 1. Select the Pay Code module located under the File Maintenance tab. 2. If no Pay Codes exist in the system the window will be in Add mode (blinking cursor in the Code field). If there are existing Pay Codes select the Record/Add button from the menu to create a new Pay Code. 3. Enter the Pay Code name. Examples of Pay Codes are: REG (Regular), OT (Overtime), DT (Double Time), SIC (Sick), etc. 3. Enter an Order No. 4. Enter the Abbreviation. 5. Enter the Description. 6. Enter the Key In Pay Code Number (This is a mandatory field with a default of 999. When this feature is not being used, leave the default number alone.) 7. Select the Type of hours that this Pay Code will be classified as. 8. If setting Automatic Pay criteria for the Pay Code, enter the If work on an automatic day: and Work day before/day after qualifier: selections. In most cases Number of Hours should be left blank. If these settings do not apply to this Pay Code, skip to the next step. 9. If setting Qualifiers for the Pay Code select those that apply. If these settings do not apply to this Pay Code, skip to the next step. 10. If setting Overtime Levels, enter the amount of hours an employee must work before the Overtime Pay Code will be applied. If these settings do not apply to this Pay Code, skip to the next step. Note: In some cases it may be necessary to create two different Pay Codes for the same type of hours, such as Regular, in order to separate those employees who receive daily overtime (non-exempt) and those who do not receive overtime (exempt). If you have Weekly Overtime only, 23:59 should be entered in Daily OT Level 2 field with a Pay Code of OT. 11. If creating a payroll export file, enter the Payroll Field ID. If these settings do not apply to this Pay Code skip to the next step. Note: For more information about this field refer to Appendix C: Payroll Setup or contact your payroll service for assistance. 12. If using Wage/Rates, enter the Hour Type Multiplier. If this setting does not apply to this Pay Code, skip to the next step. 13. When downloading hours to a terminal, enter the Hour Category for the Pay Code. If this setting does not apply to this Pay Code skip to the next step. 14. Select the Save command from the Edit menu or click on the Save button on the toolbar. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-17

33 Deleting a Pay Code: Deleting a Pay Code may affect historical reports and result in the following message being displayed Pay Code not found. To avoid this error it is recommended that a backup of the system be made before deleting any Pay Code. Refer to Chapter 10: TruTime Backup for more information on this feature. To delete a Pay Code perform the following steps: 1. Open the Pay Code module located under the File Maintenance tab. 2. Using the,,, and buttons or the drop down list located on the toolbar, select the Pay Code to be delete. 3. From the Record menu select the Delete command. 4. A confirmation message: Pay Code Reg Are you sure? will appear. Select OK to delete the Pay Code or Cancel to return to the Pay Code window. Modifying a Pay Code: All fields can be modified except for the Code Field. Any modifications made to other fields may affect historical reports. To modify a Pay Code perform the following steps: 1. Open the Pay Code module located under the File Maintenance tab 2. Using the,,, and buttons or the drop down list located on the toolbar, select the Pay Code to be modified. 3. Enter modifications. 4. Select the Save command from the Edit menu or click on the Save button on the toolbar. Exiting and Saving: Any Pay Code information added or modified must be saved before exiting. To do so, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button to save your settings. To exit the Pay Code window, select the Exit command in the File menu. Printing a Pay Code List: To print a Pay Code List select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button on the toolbar. Select the Pay Codes to be printed from the range box. The Pay Codes list will be sent to your system s printer. To change the printer settings, select the Print Setup command from the File menu TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

34 Pay Class This Section Describes: What Pay Classes are and How to Create a Pay Class The Fields and Layout of the Four Pay Class Tabs Basic Item Including: Setting Pay Period Type Setting Pay Period Defaults Setting Day Change and Day Change Override Setting Zone Code Decision Type Setting Schedule Rotation Setting Default/Lunch/Break Setting Holiday Probation Setting Awarding of Holiday Hours Time Rounding Including Setting Rounding for an Open Schedule Setting Scheduling for Exception Reporting Setting Time Rounding for a Fixed Schedule Setting Grace Time Rounding Setting Time Rounding for Daily Hours Worked Over Time Including Setting Weekly Overtime Hour Requirements Setting Weekly Overtime Reset Setting Consecutive Day Overtime Requirements Setting Consecutive Day Overtime Reset Holiday Creating Pay Class Holidays Setting Pay By value How to Delete a Pay Class How to Modify an Existing Pay Class How to Exit and Save How to Print a Pay Class List TruTime uses Pay Classes to define the rules by which an employee s time is calculated. Pay Classes are defined in the Pay Class module which consists of four tabs each with a specific function. The tabs are: Basic Item, Time Rounding, Overtime, and Holidays. The only mandatory field when creating a Pay Class is Pay Period Start Date, located under the Basic Item tab. To create a Pay Class and view the four tabs, perform the following steps: 1. Select the Pay Class icon located under the File Maintenance tab to open the module. 2. Enter the Pay Class Number in the No. field. Each Pay Class must have a specific Pay Class Number which can be up to three alphanumeric characters. 3. Select OK. 4. A confirmation dialog will appear: Would you like to add a new Pay Class, select OK or Cancel to return to the Pay Class window. Note: If a Pay Class exists, double-click the cursor in the No. field to highlight the existing Pay Class Number. Type in the new number and select OK to continue. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-19

35 Basic Item Tab As seen below, this tab allows you to set the basic rules for your Pay Class. All but the Pay Period Start Date are optional fields, however, it is recommended that each Pay Class have at least an Abbreviation and Description. Other fields have set defaults such at Pay Period Type which is set to Weekly. A definition of each field follows: Abbreviation: This field can be up to ten alphanumeric characters and will be used as the display name in Edit Daily Data, Pay Class List, and TruTime Reports. Description: This field is used for display purposes only and can be a maximum of 30 characters long. Company Code: This field is used when creating a Payroll Interface file. Company Codes are assigned by the individual Payroll Companies. Please refer to Chapter 9: Payroll Interfaces for more information on this setting. Pay Period Type: TruTime allows you to select one of four different Pay Period Types, they are: Weekly, Bi-Weekly, Semi-Monthly, and Monthly. TruTime is capable of running multiple Pay Period Types within the same system to accommodate different rules, such as Weekly for hourly employees and Bi-Weekly for salary employees. This selection also determines the date range for data seen in the Edit Daily Data module. A description of each of these types follows: Weekly Pay Period: The default for this module, TruTime displays seven days starting with the date entered in the Pay Period Start Date TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

36 Bi-Weekly Pay Period: TruTime displays 14 days starting with the date entered in the Pay Period Start Date. Semi-Monthly Pay Period: TruTime breaks the month into two parts. The first portion is for 15 days from the Pay Period Start Date and the second portion is for 16 days (Jan., Mar, May, Jul, Aug, Oct and Dec.), 15 days (Apr., Jun., Sep., Nov.), 14 days (Feb. in leap year) or 13 days (Feb.) from the end of the first portion. Note: The AU4060.INI file can be modified to change the first portion of a Semi-Monthly Pay Period from 15 days to 14 days. This is done by adding the line SemiMonthly=14 under the [Run Time] section. Monthly Pay Period: TruTime groups together 31 days for (Jan., Mar, May, Jul, Aug, Oct and Dec.), 30 days in (Apr., Jun., Sep., Nov.), 29 days in (Feb. in leap year) or 28 days (Feb.) from the Period Start Date. Pay Period Start Date: This is the only mandatory field contained within the Pay Class module. TruTime will allow you to have different Pay Period Start Dates for different pay classes. The date entered will determine what day Edit Daily Data will start displaying data for that Pay Period. To Protect the integrity of historical data, it is strongly recommended that this date not be changed. Daily Minimum Paid Hours: This field assigns the Daily Minimum Number of Hours the employee will be paid if they punch in for the day. This option will pay these hours to all employees assigned to the Pay Class, however, if the employee works more than the number entered, they will receive that number of hours for the day. These hours will be allocated when the employee first punches in. Example 1: The Daily Minimum Paid Hours is set at 6 hours. An employee works only 4 hours for the day, TruTime will display 6 hours for the day in the Edit Daily Data module. Example 2: The Daily Minimum Paid Hours is set at 6 hours. An employee works 10 hour for the day, TruTime will display 10 hours for the day in the Edit Daily Data module. Zone Code Decision Type: TruTime allows you to select one of six different Zone Code Decision Types, the default is Split. Your selection will determine how hours will be categorized when an employee works through multiple zones. The choices are: Split: The default for this module, hours will split according to the zone code in which they occur. 1st IN: Hours will be attributed to the zone code in which the first IN punch occurs. End: Hours will be attributed to the zone code in which the last OUT punch occurs. Majority: Hours will be attributed to the zone code in which the majority of the hour occurred. If the hours worked in two zones are equal then all hours will be attributed to the first zone worked in. Highest: Utilizes the Advanced Zone Code decision process and assigns the hours to the highest zone code in which an employee worked. Advanced: Utilizes the Advanced Zone Code decision process and assigns the hours based on qualifications and awards. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-21

37 Day Change Time: This field allows you to enter the time (in 24 hour format) that your business day ends and punches will be assigned to the next day. Day Change Time only needs to be changed for special scheduling cases or when employee schedules cross midnight. Example: A late shift works from 20:00 (10:00pm) to 06:00 (6:00am), Sunday through Thursday. Your company wants the hours to appear on Monday thru Friday. This is done by setting the Day Change Time for the late shift Pay Class so that it occurs before the first in punch on Sunday. Always take into account the possibility of any early IN punch. A recommended Day Change Time for this example would be 18:00 (08:00pm). Day Change Override: This field allows you to extend Day Change Time to include one punch that otherwise would have been calculated for the next day. The number entered in this field will be associated to the last IN punch recorded before Day Change Time and if the next OUT punch falls within that period of time, it will be brought back and included in the previous days calculations. Example 1: Day Change Time: 03:00 (3:00 am) Day Change Override: 12:59 (12 hours and 59 minutes) 1. TruTime sets the temporary Day Change Time from the last IN punch (02:00 am) that occurs before the actual Day Change Time and sets it for the length of the Day Change Override hours (12 hours and 59 minutes). 2. When an employee punches out (6:00 am) before the temporary Day Change Time, TruTime allocates this data to the same day as previous IN punch (2:00 am). Example 2: Day Change Time: 03:00 (3:00 am) Day Change Override: 12:59 (12 hours and 59 minutes) 1. TruTime sets the temporary Day Change Time from the last IN punch 10:00 pm (22:00) that occurs before the actual Day Change Time for the length of the Day Change Override hours (12 hours and 59 minutes). 2. When both of the IN and OUT punches (3:00 am and 7:00am) are made after the actual Day Change Time, TruTime allocates these punches to the next day. The IN punch must be inside of the actual Day Change Time in order for the Day Change Override hours to take effect. Otherwise, TruTime ignores the Day Change Override hours TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

38 Example 3: Day Change Time: 03:00 (3:00am) Day Change Override: 12:59 (12 hours and 59 minutes) 1. TruTime sets the temporary Day Change Time from the last IN punch (02:00) that occurred before the actual Day Change Time for the length of the Day Change Override hours (12 hours and 59 minutes). 2. When an employee punches out 6:00am (6:00) before the temporary Day Change Time, TruTime allocates this data to the same day as the previous IN punch (2:00). However, TruTime accepts only one punch for the same day. Other punches are incorporated into the next day. Schedule Off Hours: If the number of off hours between any two IN punches exceeds this number, then trutime will consider the second IN punch to be the first punch for the second schedule. This feature is applies to employees with Open Schedules only. Schedule Rotation: Schedule Rotation is only available for Weekly, Bi-Weekly, and Semi-Monthly Pay Classes (when using Semi-Monthly rotation the AU4060.INI must be set) and only needed when Individual Schedule are being used. Up to nine pay periods can be rotated when the Schedule Rotation module is run. The number entered in this field should be equal to or one greater than the number entered in the No. of Pay Periods to Schedule field located in the System Configuration module under the File Maintenance tab. The following chart explains how this rotation works. Holiday Probation: This field allows you to enter the number of days for an employee. Employees must be employed before being eligible to receive holiday hours. The number entered here is added to the employees Hire Date as entered in the Employee Master module located under the File Maintenance tab. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-23

39 Default Schedule/Lunch/Break: This field allows you to select a default Template No., Pay Code and Zone Differential for all employees assigned to the pay class. All three fields must be filled in when using this feature. Default Schedule/Lunch/Break is the lowest level on the schedule heirachy scale. Note: Since this is a default schedule it will not be counted towards Pay Code qualifiers or attendance exception flags. Also be aware that if the Template has a Break/Lunch assigned to it and the employee has another schedule that does not include a Break/Lunch, the Break/Lunch for this template will be used. Awarding of Holiday Hours: This section contains two drop-down lists, they are Formula for Holiday Hours and Date Range. The options contained within these drop-down lists are explained below: Use Fixed Hours: The default for the module, Holiday pay will be awarded to employees by the method selected in the Pay By field located under the Holiday tab. Average Hours Worked: Holiday pay will be awarded based on the average number of hours worked in the interval selected from the Date Range drop down list. For a Pay Code (working or non-working) to be included in this calculation, the Counts toward day before / day after qualifier must be enabled (checked) in the Automatic Pay section of the Pay Code module. Your choices are: Previous Pay Period, Current Pay Period, Previous Week, and Current Week. When selected this setting will override the holiday pay method set in the Holiday tab. Total Hours Worked: Holiday pay will be awarded based on the total number of hours worked in the interval selected from the Date Range drop down list, divided by four. This selection will override the Holiday pay method set in the Holiday tab TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

40 Time Rounding Tab As seen below, this tab allows you to set the Time Rounding rules for the Pay Class and is broken into four sections: Time Rounding/For Open Schedule, Exception Reporting, Time Rounding/Grace Zone/For Fixed Schedule and Time Rounding/For Daily Hours Worked. All fields in this module are optional and when left blank, an employees punched time will be calculated to the exact minute worked. TruTime uses two values, the Unit and Point to define Time Rounding. The Unit is a numeric value used to adjust an employee punch time to a consistent measurement of time. Common Units are 3, 6, 15, and 30. Each Unit is divided by a Point. The Point a numeric value used to determine at which moment an employee's punch would be moved forward to the next Unit. The rule for rounding is that the Point always moves forward. If the Unit is set at 15, and the Point is 7, any punch from 8:00 to 8:06 will be rounded to 8:00. Any punch from 8:07 to 8:15 will be rounded to 8:15. Similarly, any punch from 8:15 to 8:21 will be rounded to 8:15, and any punch after (and including) 8:22 will be rounded to 8:30. This is shown in the diagram below: TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-25

41 Time Rounding/For Open Schedule: This section allows you to define Time Rounding for employees with an Open Schedule (no start and end time), and when Paid As Punch (PAP) is applied in Edit Daily Data. The IN and OUT Unit and Point of this section is also used for all Break/Lunch punches, even for employees with a Fixed Schedule. Time Rounding/For Fixed Schedule: This section allows you to define time rounding for the 1st IN and Last OUT punch when a Fixed Schedule is being used. Time Rounding/Grace Zone: This section sets the Grace zones which are one time rounding rules associated to the fixed start and end time of an employees schedule. Grace will override the rounding parameters that have been set in the Time Rounding for a Fixed Schedule section. Depending on where the Unit and Point have been set, the Grace setting will determine whether the punch is pushed forward or backward from the start and end time for calculation purposes. Exception Reporting: This section is used to define the Point for Tardy/Early Leave, Lunch Hours, and Break Hours for Exception Reporting. This setting has no effect on calculations. Time Rounding for Daily Hours Worked: This section is used to round punch pairs in calculating the daily hours for an employee and cannot be used with any other type of rounding. Using this section, the total time between IN and OUT punches will be rounded instead of rounding each individual punch TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

42 Over Time Tab As seen below, this tab is broken out into two sections: Weekly Overtime and Consecutive Day Overtime. These sections allow you to create the overtime rules for each Pay Class. The Weekly Overtime section allows you to define up to three different weekly overtime conditions for each Pay Class. Weekly OT Hours, enter the total number of hours in a week that an employee must work before hours are tiered to OT. Pay Code OT Level No., corresponds to the Overtime Level Number (1, 2 or 3) assigned in the Pay Code module and determines the Pay Code that will be assigned to OT hours. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-27

43 In the example above the employees hours are detailed by the date they occurred. 9/2/96: The employee receives 8 hours for Holiday. These 8 hours come from the Holiday setting in Pay Class. The Holiday setting overrides other schedules. These 8 hours count toward the weekly overtime, because the qualifier "Count toward weekly overtime calculation has been selected for the Holiday Pay Code. 9/3/96: The 8 hours worked are assigned to the Regular Pay Code, because the scheduled Pay Code of 9/3/96 is REG (Regular). These 8 hours count towards the weekly overtime because the qualifier has been selected. Accumulated Hours for weekly overtime qualifier is 16 hours at this point TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

44 9/4/96: The same as 9/3/96, at this point Accumulated Hours for Weekly Overtime Hours qualified is 24. 9/5/96: The 9 hours worked are assigned to the Regular Pay Code, because the scheduled Pay Code of 9/5/96 is REG (Regular) and there is no daily overtime setting. Accumulated Hours of weekly overtime qualifier is 33 hours at this point. 9/6/96: The Accumulated Hours that apply to the weekly overtime qualifier is 42 hours, this exceeds the Weekly Overtime Hours qualifier of 40 hours as set in the Pay Class module, therefor the 9 hours on 9/6/96 are split into 7 hours Regular and 2 hours OT. In this case the Scheduled Pay Code is REG on 9/6/96 and Pay Code OT Level No. of the Pay Class is 2. Therefore, the exceeded 2 hours are assigned to the OT Pay Code. 9/7/96: At this point the accumulated hours of weekly overtime qualifier is 50 so the 8 hours worked on this day are assigned to the OT Pay Code. This is done because the Scheduled Pay Code is NWD and the Pay Code counts towards the weekly qualifier. The OT Level No. of the Pay Class is 2. Therefore, the 8 hours is sorted to the OT Pay Code. OT Reset Mode: TruTime provides two choices for resetting Overtime, Pay Period Start, or Week Start. The selection made will determine when the weekly overtime hours are reset for the Pay Class. When Pay Period Start is selected, the weekly overtime count is not reset until the start of a new pay period. When Week Start is selected, the weekly overtime count will be reset on the day of the week selected in the Start Day of Week drop-down list. Consecutive Day 1 and 2: These fields set the Consecutive Day Overtime Qualifiers and the Pay Codes that will be applied to hours worked once the qualifier is met. Consecutive Day Overtime rules will override weekly and/or daily overtime rules No. of Days: Enter the number of days from 0-7 that must be worked before an employee is awarded the consecutive day Pay Code. Consecutive Day Reset: This area is used to specify when the consecutive Day Overtime Count is reset. You can reset Consecutive Day Overtime Count based on the day of the week or the start of the new pay period. When Pay Period Start is selected, Consecutive Day Overtime will not reset until the start of a new Pay Period. When Week Start is selected, Consecutive Day Overtime will be reset on the day of the week that is selected from the MO-SU drop-down list. When neither box is selected, TruTime counts the consecutive days until an employee takes a day off. Examples of each are as follows:. Consecutive Day 1 is set to 5 with OT as the Pay Code, REG and OT Pay Codes have the Count toward consecutive day calculation box selected. Case 1: Consecutive Day Count is more than 5 so the 8 hours worked on the 6th day are awarded the OT Pay Code. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-29

45 Case 2: Consecutive Day Count is reset on Wednesday because the employee takes a day off. Consecutive Day Count has been reset on Wednesday so that 8 hours on Saturday appears as REG hours. Case 3: Consecutive Day Count is more than 5 days on Saturday so that 8 hours on Saturday and Sunday are awarded the OT Pay Code, however, Consecutive Day Count is reset on Monday so the 8 hours on Monday appears as REG TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

46 Holiday Tab The Holiday tab is used to schedule holidays for the employees assigned to the Pay Class. TruTime allows you to schedule up to twenty holidays which can be national holidays, factory shutdown times or company events. It is recommended that spaces not be skipped in this tab to avoid calculation issues. Holidays can be scheduled as far in advance as space permits. Once all 20 rows are filled, you will have to delete previous years Holidays. A historic backup of the system should be made before deleting any Holiday. Refer to Chapter 10: Trutime Backup for more information on this feature. Once scheduled and any specified qualifers have been met, TruTime will automatically generate hours for the employees. This Tab consists of six fields, all of which must be filled out before the holiday will be saved. Each of these fields is defined below: Holiday: The date that the Holiday is to be paid using the mm/dd/yyyy format. This date may differ from the actual date of the holiday to accommodate times when a holiday, such as July 4th, occurs on Sunday and employees are given off the Friday before or Monday after. Description: Used to describe the Holiday, this field can be up to 30 characters. Pay Code: The Pay Code to be applied to the Holiday hours. Zone Code: The Zone Code to be applied to the Holiday hours. Pay By: TruTime offers two options, Value and Schedule. When Value is selected, the employee will be awarded holiday pay for the number of hours in the Hours to Pay field. When Schedule is selected, the employee will be awarded holiday pay for the amount of hours that they are normally scheduled for on the day that the holiday occurs. This can be affected by selections made in the Awarding of Holiday Hours section of the Basic Item tab. Hours to Pay: The number of Holiday hours to be awarded when Value is selected in the Pay By type. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-31

47 Adding a Pay Class: Basic Item Tab 1. Enter the abbreviation for the Pay Class in the Abbreviation field. 2. Enter the Company Code. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step. 3. Enter the description for the Pay Class in the Description field. 4. Select the Pay Period Type that applies to this Pay Class. 5. Enter the Pay Period Start Date in using the mm/dd/yyyy format. 6. Enter the Daily Minimum Paid Hours. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step. 7. Select the Zone Code Decision Type. that applies to this Pay Class. 8. Enter the Day Change Time using the 24 hour format. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step. 9. Enter the Day Change Override using the 24 hour format. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step. 10. Enter the Scheduled Off Hours using the 24 hour format. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step. Note: 4:00 is the recommended value. 11. Select the Schedule Rotation box and enter the Number of Pay Periods to Schedule. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step. 12. Selected the Default Schedule/Lunch/Break. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step. 13. Enter the Holiday Probation number. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step. 14. Select the Awarding of Holiday Hours, Formula for Holiday Hours, and Date Range from the drop down lists. If this does not apply to this Pay Class, go to the next step Select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your settings. Time Rounding Tab Time Rounding For Open Schedule: To be used for employees who have no fixed start or end time. 1. Click in the 1st IN Unit field, enter in the Unit value, and press the Tab key. 2. Enter in the Point value, and press the Tab key. 3. Repeat above for the IN, OUT, and Last OUT punches. Time Rounding For a Fixed Schedule: To be used for schedules that have start and end times. 1. Click in the Early IN Unit field, enter in the Unit value, and press the Tab key. 2. Enter in the Point value, and press the Tab key. 3. Repeat above for Late IN, Early OUT, and Late OUT punches. Grace Zones For a Fixed Schedule: To be used for schedules that have start and end times. 1. Click in the Grace Early IN Unit field, enter in the Unit value, and press the Tab key. 2. Enter in the Point value, and press the Tab key. 3. Repeat the above steps for Grace Late IN, Grace Early OUT, and Grace Late OUT punches TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

48 Exception Reporting: 1. In the Tardy/Early Leave Unit field enter in the Unit value and press the Tab key. 2. Enter the Point value and press the Tab key. 3. Repeat the above steps for Lunch and Break Hours punches. Time Rounding for Daily Hours Worked: Used for any schedule type. 1. In the Hours Worked for Each Punch Pair Unit field, enter in the Unit value and press the Tab key. 2. Enter the Point value and press the Tab key. 3. Select the Save command from the File menu, or click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your settings. 3. When the Pay Class appears in the window, select the Delete command from the File menu. A confirmation dialog will appear. Click on OK or press the Enter key. Over Time Tab 1. Select the Over Time tab. 2. Enter the Weekly OT Hours Enter the Pay Code OT Level No.. 4. Repeat for Weekly 2 and 3 if needed. 5. Select the Overtime Reset Mode. 6. Enter the No. of Days for Consecutive Day 1 and the Pay Code to be awarded. If these settings do not apply to this Pay Class go to the next step. 7. Repeat for Consecutive Day Select the Consecutive Day Rest mode. 9. Select the Save command from the File menu, or click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your settings. Holiday Tab 1. Select the Holiday tab. 2. Enter the date to award the Holiday in the Holiday field. 3. Enter the name of of the Holiday in the Description field. 4. Select the Pay Code to be awarded for the Holiday from the list in the text box of the toolbar. 5. Select the Pay By type from the list in the text box of the toolbar. 6. If Value is selected, enter the amount of hours to be awarded for the Holiday. 7. Repeat as needed. 8. Select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar to save your settings. Note: Modifying a Holiday may affect historical reports. To avoid this error, it is recommended that a backup of the system be made before deleting any Holiday. Refer to Chapter 10: TruTime Backup for more information on this feature. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-33

49 Copying a Pay Class: To assist in the creation of multiple Pay Classes with similar rules, TruTime includes the "Save As" command located under the File menu. When selected, the following dialog box will be displayed: Enter the new Pay Class (Equal to No. field), the Abbreviation, and Description for the new Pay Class and select the OK button. A new Pay Class will be created with all the settings of the currently displayed Pay Class. Modifying a Pay Class: To modify a Pay Class, open the desired class and make the necessary changes. TruTime s calculation engine will automatically run once any change has been made. Changes made to any calculation field such as Rounding or Overtime may result in the change in historical data. Deleting a Pay Class: To delete a Pay Class, you must first remove employees assigned to it. TruTime will not allow you to delete a Pay Class if employees are currently assigned to it. Pay Class assignments are removed from employees in the Basic Info tab of Employee Master. To delete a Pay Class, perform the following: 1. Select the Pay Class item from the File Maintenance tab. The Pay Class dialog box will appear. 2. Select the Pay Class that you want to delete from the list, and click on OK. 3. When the Pay Class appears in the window, select the Delete command from the File menu. A confirmation dialog will appear. Click on OK or press the Enter key. 4. The Pay Class dialog box will reappear. Select another Pay Class from the list and click on OK to return to the Pay Class window or click on the Cancel button to exit. Exiting and Saving: Any Pay Class information added or modified must be saved before exiting. To do so, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button to save your settings. To exit the Pay Code window, select the Exit command in the File menu. Printing a Pay Code List: To print a Pay Class List, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button on the toolbar. Select the range of Pay Classes to be printed from the drop-down boxes. The Pay Class list will be sent to your system s printer. To change the printer settings, select the Print Setup command from the File menu TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

50 System Configuration This Section Describes: Company Name Payroll Company Payroll File Name No. of Pay Periods to Schedule Report Setup Use Audit Train Report Print Inactive Employees Count Non-Work Hours as Not Absent Hours Authorization The System Configuration module displayed above is located under the File Maintenance tab. This module allows you to configure settings for Payroll, Reporting, Scheduling, and Edit Daily Data view. Each of the these settings are defined below and can be changed as need. To print a copy of these settings, select the Print command from the File menu or click the Print button on the toolbar. The System Configuration module consists of the following: Company Name: Up to ten alphanumeric characters can be used to enter your company name. The Company Name is not displayed anywhere in TruTime. The default is: Amano Sample, but this should be changed to your individual company name. Payroll Company: The payroll software packages displayed in the list box are based on your individual TruTime profile. This field is mandatory when creating a payroll export. TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup 2-35

51 Payroll File Name: Enter the location and file name for the Payroll Export file. This is often assigned by the payroll software company. For more information, please refer to Chapter 9: Payroll Interfaces of this manual. No. of Pay Periods to Schedule: This is used only when assigning Individual Schedules. This dropdown list allows you to select 1-9 as the number of pay periods that will be displayed in the Individual Schedule module. Note: This number should be equal to or one greater than the number selected in the Schedule Rotation section of Pay Class. Report Setup: TruTime allows you to select three minute format options, 60th, 100th (2 decimals), or 1000th (3 decimals) for the display of data in reports and the Edit Daily Data module. Use Audit Trail Data: The first of four Yes/No questions, when set to Yes, all changes made in the Edit Daily Data module will be recorded and displayed in the Audit Trail Report. Note: This feature requires additional disk space. Print Inactive Employees: When set to Yes, inactive employees will appear on all reports. If set to No, the employees will cease to appear on reports beginning on the date entered in the Inactive Date field of the Employee Master module. Count Non-Work Hours as NOT Absent: When set to Yes, if an employee is absent and receives Non- Worked Hours for that day the employee will no longer appear on reports when the ABS exception is selected. If set to NO, the employee will still be displayed on reports when the ABS exception is selected. Hours Authorization: When set to Yes, a check mark must be placed next to the employees hours in the Edit Daily Data module before hours are included in the payroll export file. When set to No, all hours will be included in the Payroll Export file without being authorized TRUTIME / TruTime Basic Setup

52 Chapter 3: Schedule Setup TruTime s schedule features enable you to automatically track, calculate, pay, award and report on employee hours. They include Zone Differentials, break and lunch periods, employee schedules, standby schedules, advance schedules, schedule rotation, and lockin schedules for data collection terminals. This Chapter Includes: Zone Differential: Zone Differentials allow you to split work days into nine time zones, where each time zone is assigned a start and end time. This gives you the ability to report on these zones, award differential pay, and award hours or dollars. Zone Differentials are created in the Zone Differential window, which is accessed through the File Maintenance tab. Break/Lunch: This window enables you to create automatic break or lunch deductions. Once defined, the Auto Break periods can be inserted into employee schedules. The Break/Lunch window is accessed through the File Maintenance tab. Template Schedule: This allows you to create basic work schedules that include a Start Time, End Time, and an Auto Break. Template Schedules are created in the Template Schedule window, which is accessed through the Schedules tab. Auto Schedule: An Auto Schedule is an employee s assigned schedule, based on the employee s First IN punch. Auto Schedules consist of a Start Time and an assigned Template Schedule. Auto Schedules are created in the Auto Schedule window, which is accessed through the Schedules tab. Individual Schedule: This window enables you to create a schedule for individual employees for a selected Pay Period. The Individual Schedule window is accessed through the Schedules tab. Schedule Rotation: This feature is used to rotate individual Schedules and is located in the Schedules tab. Advance Schedule: The Advance Schedule window is used to schedule an individual employee s time off (Vacation, Holiday, Personal). The Advance Schedule window is accessed through the Schedules tab. Standby Schedule: This feature enables you to pre-schedule employees to be on standby status. The Standby Schedule is located in the Schedules tab. LockIn Schedule: The LockIn Schedule window enables you to create a set of four time zones during which employees will be permitted to punch in at the data collection terminals. LockIn Schedules must be downloaded to the terminals once every seven days to keep the schedule current. This feature is located in the Schedules tab. TruScheduler: TruScheduler is an enhanced version of the Individual Schedule and Advanced Schedule. It accomplishes the same basic tasks but in a more user friendly and has no limit to the number of days that can be scheduled. This module also has a built in report that can be used for posting an employee s schedule. TruScheduler is accessed through the Schedules tab. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-1

53 Zone Differential This Section Describes How To: Add a Zone Differential Setup an Advanced Zone Differential Saving Your Data Viewing Existing Zone Differentials Delete a Zone Differential Print a List of Zone Differentials A Zone Differential allows you to split work days into nine time zones. Each time zone is assigned a start and end time, and gives you the ability to report on zones, award differential pay, and award hours and dollars. Zone Differentials are created in the Zone Differential window which is accessed by selecting the Zone Differential menu item in the File Maintenance tab. 3-2 TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

54 Adding a New Zone Differential 1. In the Zone Differential window, select the Add command from the Record menu. This will clear all the fields in the window and place the cursor in the Zone Differential Number field. 2. In the Zone Differential Number field, enter a number from 1 to 99, it is recommend that these numbers be assigned in sequential order. If this is the first Zone Differential enter In the Zone Differential Abbreviation field, enter in a description (up to ten alphanumeric characters) of the Zone Differential. For example: 4. For Advanced Zone Setup click on the Advanced checkbox, continue on with the following steps, and then proceed to the Advanced Zone Setup section of this chapter. For Basic Zone Setup, do not check the Advanced checkbox. 5. Enter in a Start Time (in 24 hour format) for Zone 1. The zone begins with the Start Time and ends one minute before the next zone Start Time. The last Start Time will wrap around to the first zone. 6. For Advanced Zone Setup, you must enter the End Time (in 24 hour format) of the Zone Code. The End Time of the Zone Code must be equal to the Start Time of the next Zone Code and you must specify a 24 hour period. 7. For Advanced Zone Setup, you must enter the day that the Start and End Times occur. This is done in the columns preceding both the Start and End Times. Select C (Current day), P (Previous day), or N (Next day) if the zone ends after midnight. 8. In the Zone Code field, select a Zone Code from the drop down list. This Zone Code will be used in creating schedules, along with assigning hours to a day in the Edit Daily Data window. This code will appear as a number until a Zone Code Abbreviation is set for each Zone Code. 9. Save settings. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-3

55 9. Click on the Zone Maintenance button in the toolbar or select the Zone Maintenance command from the Zone menu. The Zone Code Abbreviation window will appear: This enables you to assign an Abbreviation (Description) to each Zone Code. When set, the Abbreviations will replace the numbers in the Zone Code list. For example: 10. Repeat steps 5 thru 9 for Zone Codes 2 thru 9, or as necessary. 11. Click on the Save button in the toolbar or select the Save command from File menu. 12. Repeat for as many Zone Differentials as necessary. 3-4 TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

56 Advanced Zone Setup When checked, the Advanced Zone Setup allows you to set qualification rules and award rules for the nine Zone Codes in a given Zone Differential. The qualification rules are used to determine whether you are eligible for your hours to be paid at that Zone Code. The Award Rules will allow you to transfer hours to another Pay Code, duplicate hours to another Pay Code, or award hours (in minutes) or dollars (in cents). The basic guidelines for the Advanced Zone Setup are as follows: Zone Windows (the periods between Zone Code Start and End Times) must be defined for all hours of the day. Zone Code Start and End Times must be defined. Zone Windows cannot overlap. The Zone Code Decision Type of the employee s Pay Class must be set to Advanced. Zone Qualification Rules must be defined. Zone Award Rules must be defined. Zone Qualification Rules: The Zone Qualification Rules window is used to set up qualification rules for each of the nine Zone Codes when using the Advanced Zone Setup. It is accessed by selecting the Qualification Rules command in the Zone menu. The fields for this window are as follows: Type: The category of hours looked at when deciding if the employee qualifies for the Zone Code. Condition: Based on the zone Type, determines which hours to compare against the Value. Comparison: How to compare the hours from Type and Condition to the Value. Value: The minutes or percentage of time to compare with the hours from Type and Condition. Default Zone Code: The Zone Code that will be applied if the qualification rule is not met. If no default Zone Code is set and the employee does not qualify, then the hours will always default to Zone Code. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-5

57 The Zone Qualification Rules can be set as follows: Once you have set the Zone Qualification Rules, click on the OK button. 3-6 TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

58 Zone Award Rules: The Zone Award Rules window is used to set up the Award Rules for each of the nine Zone Codes when using the Advanced Zone Setup. It is accessed by selecting the Award Rules command in the Zone menu. Enter in the following fields for each applicable Zone Code and click on the OK button. (Award) Source: What will be awarded if the employee qualifies for that Zone Code. (Award) Type: Categorizes the Pay Codes that count toward the hours to award based on the Award Source. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-7

59 Pay Code: Allows the end user to select the Pay Code to pay the award hours to. If the Award Source is none and a pay Code is selected than only hours worked in that Zone Code will be transferred from the scheduled Pay Code to the selected Pay Code if qualified. Value: The amount to award when Value is selected as the Award Source. Value Type: Time or money depending on the award. Time must be in minutes, and money must be entered in 1/100th of a dollar. Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting to the File Maintenance tab. Viewing Zone Differentials To view existing Zone Differentials; select a desired Zone Differential from the list in the text box on the toolbar, select the First, Previous, Next, or Last Record commands from the View menu, or click on the,,, and buttons in the toolbar. Deleting Zone Differentials A Zone Differential must be currently displayed in the Zone Differential window to be deleted. Once the desired Zone Differential is in the display, select the Delete command from the Record menu. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the OK button to delete the Zone Differential. 3-8 TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

60 Printing Out a List of Zone Differentials To print out of a list of your Zone Differentials, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. A print preview of this list will appear on your screen. To send this list to your system s printer, click on the Print button on the preview window's border. To change your printer settings, select the Print Setup command from the File menu. A Windows Print Setup dialog will appear. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-9

61 Advanced Award Rules Examples Award Pay Code: TruTime will transfer the hours worked in each zone to the Pay Code specified in the award rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. None is set as the Award Source and a Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to the PR2 Pay Code. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for 3 hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Award Work Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours worked for the day Award Rule. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Work is set as the Award Source and Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition, an award of 22:00 hours would be given to both Zone 2 and Zone 3 as Pay Code PR1 and PR2, respectively TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

62 The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 22:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 22:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Award Before Schedule Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours worked before your schedule. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Before Schedule is set as the Award Source and Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition, an award of hours worked before schedule will be given. In this case the schedule starts at 15:00 and there are three hours before the schedule. The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 3:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 3:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for 3 hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-11

63 Award Within Schedule Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours worked within your schedule. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Within Schedule is set as the Award Source and Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition, an award of hours worked within schedule will be given. In this case the schedule starts at 15:00 and ends at 22:00, therefore there are seven hours within the schedule. The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 7:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 7:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Award After Schedule Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours worked within your schedule. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. After Schedule is set as the Award Source and Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition, an award of hours worked after schedule will be given. In this case the schedule ends at 22:00 and there are twelve hours after the schedule TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

64 The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 12:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 12:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Award Before Zone Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours worked before the Zone Window. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Before Zone is set as the Award Source and a Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition, an award of hours worked before the zone will be given. In this case Zone 2 starts at 15:00 and there are three hours worked before Zone 2; Zone 3 starts at 22:00 and there are ten hours worked before Zone 3. The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 3:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 10:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-13

65 Award Within Zone Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours worked within the Zone Window. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Within Zone is set as the Award Source and a Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition, an award of hours worked within the zone will be given. In this case Zone 2 starts at 15:00 and ends at 22:00, there are seven hours worked within Zone 2; Zone 3 starts at 22:00 and ends at 07:00, there are nine hours worked within Zone 3. The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 7:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 9:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Award After Zone Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours worked after the Zone Window. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. After Zone is set as the Award Source and a Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition, an award of hours worked after the zone will be given. In this case the Zone 2 ends at 22:00 and there are twelve hours after Zone 2; Zone 3 ends at 07:00 and there are three hours after Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

66 The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 12:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 3:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for 3 hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Award Schedule Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours scheduled. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Schedule is set as the Award Source and Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition an award of scheduled hours will be given. In this case the schedule starts at 15:00 and ends at 22:00, there are seven hours scheduled. The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 7:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 7:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-15

67 Award Zone Hours: Additional hours are awarded based on the amount of hours in the Zone Window. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Zone is set as the Award Source and Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Any hours worked in Zone 2 will be transferred to PR1 Pay Code and any hours from Zone 3 will be transferred to PR2 Pay Code. In addition, an award of Zone hours will be given. In this case the Zone 2 starts at 15:00 and ends at 22:00, there are seven hours in Zone 2; Zone 3 starts at 22:00 and ends at 07:00, there are nine hours in Zone 3. The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 7:00 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 9:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Award Value Hours: Additional hours (represented as minutes) are awarded based on the amount of hours entered in the value on the award rules screen. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Zone is set as the Award Source and a Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Since the Pay Code is based on value, the hours will not transfer to that Pay Code and stay as REG. In addition, an award of Value Hours will be given. In this case the Zone 2 Value Hours are 1:00; Zone 3 Value Hours are 2: TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

68 The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 1:00 Zone 3 REG 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for 3 hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Award Value Dollars: TruTime will award additional Dollars (represented as cents) based on the amount of dollars entered in the Value field in the Award Rules window. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Zone is set as the Award Source and Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Since the Pay Code is based on value the hours will not transfer to that Pay Code and stay as REG. In addition an award of Value Dollars will be given. In this case the Zone 2 Value Dollars are $100.00; Zone 3 Value Dollars are $ The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 BN1 Zone 2: $ Zone 3 REG 9:00 BN2 Zone 3: $ Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-17

69 Award Value Multiplier Hours: TruTime will award additional hours (represented in minutes) based on the amount of hours entered in the Value field in the Award Rules window multiplied by the hours worked in that Zone Window. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Zone is set as the Award Source and a Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Since the Pay Code is based on Value, the hours will not transfer to that Pay Code and stay as REG. In addition, an award of Value Hours will be given. In this case the Zone 2 Value Hours are 0:01; Zone 3 Value Hours are 0:02. For Zone 2 the award will be 0:01 X 7 (Hours worked in Zone 2) = 0:07. For Zone 3 the award will be 0:02 X 9 (Hours worked in Zone 3) = 0:18. The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 PR1 7:00 PR1 Zone 2: 0:07 Zone 3 PR2 9:00 PR2 Zone 3: 0:18 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for 3 hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for 3 hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

70 Award Value Multiplier Dollars: TruTime will award additional Dollars (represented as cents) based on the amount of dollars entered in the Value field of the Award Rules window multiplied by the hours worked in that Zone Window. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. Zone is set as the Award Source and a Pay Code is set for Zone 2 and Zone 3. Since the Pay Code is based on Value, the hours will not transfer to that Pay Code and stay as REG. In addition, an award of Value Dollars will be given. In this case the Zone 2 Value Dollars are $0.25; Zone 3 Value Dollars are $0.50. For Zone 2 the award will be $0.25 X 7 (Hours worked in Zone 2) = $1.75. For Zone 3 the award will be $0.50 X 9 (Hours worked in Zone 3) = $4.50.The hours distribution is: Awarded Hours Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 BN1 Zone 2: $1.75 Zone 3 REG 9:00 BN2 Zone 3: $4.50 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3 TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-19

71 Advanced Zone Qualification Examples No Qualification: TruTime will award hours unconditionally for each zone an employee works. In this example you will see the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 10:00 the next day for a total of 22:00 hours. With no qualifying rules any hours worked in a zone will be applied to the zone code defined in that window. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 6:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone 3 REG 9:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in the first Zone 1 and 7:00-10:00 for three hours in the second Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-7:00 for nine hours in Zone 3. Work Hours: Award hours are based on the total hours worked for the day compared to the value in qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 00:30 the next day for a total of 12:30 hours. With the qualification rule based on total hours worked, the employee must work greater than or equal to 180 minutes (three hours) to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 840 minutes (14 hours) to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 750 minutes (12-1/2 hours). Therefore, the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

72 The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 5:30 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone 3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in Zone 1 and 22:00-00:30 for 2:30 from Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Worked Hours Before Schedule: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) before your schedule compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule based on hours worked before schedule, the employee must work greater than or equal to 120 minutes (two hours) before schedule to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 180 minutes (three hours) before schedule to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 120 minutes (two hours) before schedule, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 16:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 5:00-7:00 for two hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1, and 22:00-4:00 for six hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1 Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-21

73 Punch Before Schedule: Award hours are based on the time difference between FIRST IN punch (without breaks) and schedule Start Time compared to the value in qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule based on punched before schedule, the employee must punch IN greater than or equal to 240 minutes (four hours) before the schedule Start Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 120 minutes (two hours) before the schedule Start Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched IN 120 minutes (two hours) before the schedule Start Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 2 hours. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 15:00 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone3 REG 8:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-22:00 for seven hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for two hours from the first Zone 3 and 22:00-4:00 for 6:00 from the second Zone 3. Worked Hours Within Schedule: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) within your schedule compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on hours worked within schedule, the employee must work greater than or equal to 240 minutes (four hours) within schedule to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 540 minutes (nine hours) within schedule to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 480 minutes (eight hours) within schedule, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 16: TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

74 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone 3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 5:00-7:00 for 2:00 from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1, and 22:00-4:00 for 6:00 from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Punch After Schedule: Award hours based on the time difference between Last OUT punch (without breaks) and schedule end time compared to the value in qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 18:30 for a total of 13:30 hours. With the qualification rule base on punched after schedule, the employee must punch OUT greater than or equal to 480 minutes (eight hours) after the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 120 minutes (two hours) after the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched OUT 210 minutes (3-1/2 hours) after the schedule End Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 2 hours. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 11:30 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-18:30 for 3:30 from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for two hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-23

75 Worked Hours After Schedule: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) after your schedule compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 18:30 for a total of 13:30 hours. With the qualification rule base on hours worked after schedule, the employee must work greater than or equal to 240 minutes (four hours) after the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 60 minutes (one hour) after the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 210 minutes (3-1/2 hours) after the schedule End Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 2 hours. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is as: Zone 1 REG 11:30 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-18:30 for 3:30 from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for 2:00 in Zone 3. Percentage of Worked Hours Before Schedule: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) before your schedule compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on percentage of hours worked before schedule, the employee must work greater than or equal to 5% before schedule to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 30% before schedule to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 120 minutes (two hours) before schedule, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 3 hours because the percentage of worked hours before the schedule are 2 (hours)/ 23 (hours) =.086 X 100 = 8.6%. All Zone 3 hours will go 3-24 TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

76 to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 16:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone 3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 5:00-7:00 for two hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1, and 22:00-4:00 for six hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Percentage of Punch Before Schedule: TruTime will award hours based on the time difference between FIRST IN punch (without breaks) and schedule Start Time compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example you will see the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule based on percentage of punched before schedule, the employee must punch IN greater than or equal to 50% before the schedule Start Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 5% before the schedule Start Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched IN 120 minutes (two hours) before the schedule Start Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of time between FIRST IN and the schedule Start Time is 2 (hours)/23 (hours) =.086 X 100 = 8.6%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 15:00 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 8:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-22:00 for 7:00 from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for two hours from the first Zone 3 and 22:00-4:00 for six hours from the second Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-25

77 Percentage of Worked Hours Within Schedule: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) within your schedule compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example you will see the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on percentage of hours worked within schedule, the employee must work greater than or equal to 25% within schedule to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 50% within schedule to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 480 minutes (eight hours) within schedule, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 3 hours because the percentage of worked hours within the schedule is 8 (hours)/23 (hours) =.34 X 100 = 34%. All Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 16:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone 3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 5:00-7:00 for 2:00 from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1, and 22:00-4:00 for six hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Percentage of Punch After Schedule: Award hours are based on the time difference between Last OUT punch (without breaks) and schedule End Time compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

78 In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 18:30 for a total of 13:30 hours. With the qualification rule based on percentage of punched after schedule, the employee must punch OUT greater than or equal to 75% after the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 20% after the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched OUT 210 minutes (3-1/2 hours) after the schedule End Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of time between Last OUT and schedule end time is 3-1/2 (hours)/13-1/2 (hours) =.259 X 100 = 25.9%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 11:30 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-18:30 for 3-1/2 hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for 2:00 in Zone 3. Percentage of Worked Hours After Schedule: Award hours based on the hours worked (with breaks) after your schedule compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 18:30 for a total of 13:30 hours. With the qualification rule base on percentage of hours worked after schedule, the employee must work greater than or equal to 50% after the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 20% after schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 210 minutes (3-1/2 hours) after the schedule, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of worked hours after the schedule are 3-1/2 (hours)/13-1/2 (hours) =.259 X 100 = 25.9%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution for this example is: Zone 1 REG 11:30 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-18:30 for 3-1/2 hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for 2:00 in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-27

79 Percentage of Hours from In Punch after Schedule Start: Award hours are based on the time difference between FIRST IN punch (without breaks) and schedule Start Time as long as the FIRST IN punch is after the schedule Start Time compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 8:00 and OUT at 2:00 the next day for a total of 18:00 hours. With the qualification rule based on percentage of punched IN after schedule start, the employee must punch IN greater than or equal to 25% after the schedule Start Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 5% after the schedule Start Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched IN sixty minutes (one hour) after the schedule Start Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of time between FIRST IN and the schedule Start Time is 1(hour)/18 (hours) =.055 X 100 = 5.5%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 14:00 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 4:00 Zone 1 hours come from 8:00-15:00 for seven hours in Zone 1, 15:00-22:00 for seven hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-2:00 for four hours in Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

80 Percentage of Hours from Out Punch before Schedule End: TruTime will award hours based on the time difference between Last OUT punch (without breaks) and schedule End Time as long as the Last OUT punch is before the schedule End Time compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 23:00 the previous day and OUT at 14:00 for a total of 15:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on percentage of punched OUT before schedule end, the employee must punch OUT greater than or equal to 20% before the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 5% before the schedule End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched OUT 210 minutes (3-1/2 hours) before the schedule End Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours but he does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of worked hours before the schedule is 1 (hour)/15 (hours) =.066 X 100 = 6.6%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 7:00 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 8:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-14:00 for seven hours in Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 23:00-7:00 for eight hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-29

81 Worked Hours Before Zone: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) before the Zone Window compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on hours worked before the zone, the employee must work greater than 420 minutes (eight hours) before Zone 2 Start Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 420 minutes (eight hours) before Zone 3 Start Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 600 minutes (ten hours) before Zone 2; therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours. The employee worked a total of 0 minutes (no hours) before the first Zone 3, therefore not qualifying for those hours. The employee worked a total of 1020 minutes (17 hours) before the second Zone 3, therefore qualifying for those hours. The first Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution for this example is: Zone 1 REG 10:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone 3 REG 6:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 5:00-7:00 for two hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-4:00 for 6 hours in Zone 3. Punch Before Zone: Award hours are based on the time difference between the FIRST IN punch (without breaks) and the Zone Window Start Time compared to the value in the qualification rules TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

82 In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 16:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on punched before zone, the employee must punch IN greater than or equal to 240 minutes (four hours) before the Zone Start Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 240 minutes (four hours) before the Zone Start Time time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched IN 180 minutes (three hours) before the Zone 2 Start Time; therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 2 hours. The employee punched IN 600 minutes (ten hours) before the Zone 3 Start Time; therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 10:00 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 6:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in Zone 1, 15:00-22:00 for 7:00 from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-4:00 for six hours in Zone 3. Worked Hours Within Zone: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) within Zone Window compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on hours worked within a zone, the employee must work greater than or equal to 420 minutes (seven hours) within the Zone Window to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 420 minutes (seven hours) within the Zone Window to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 420 minutes (seven hours) in Zone 2 Window; therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours. The employee worked a total of 120 minutes (two hours) in the first Zone 3 Window; therefore he does not qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 360 minutes (six hours) in the second Zone 3 Window; therefore he does not qualify for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 16:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone 3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 5:00-7:00 for 2:00 from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1, and 22:00-4:00 for six hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone 2. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-31

83 Punch After Zone: Award hours are based on the time difference between the Last OUT punch (without breaks) and the Zone Window End Time compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 18:30 for a total of 13:30 hours. With the qualification rule based on punched after the zone, the employee must punch OUT greater than or equal to 240 minutes (four hours) after the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 240 minutes (four hours) after the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched OUT zero minutes (no hours) after the Zone 2 Window End Time, therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 2 hours. The employee punched OUT 690 minutes (11-1/2 hours) after the first Zone 3 Window End Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 11:30 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-18:30 for 3-1/2 hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for two hours in Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

84 Worked Hours After Zone: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) after the Zone Window compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 18:30 for a total of 13-1/2 hours. With the qualification rule based on hours worked after the zone, the employee must work greater than or equal to 240 minutes (four hours) after the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 240 minutes (four hours) after the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 0 minutes (0 hours) after the Zone 2 window, therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 2 hours. The employee worked a total of 690 minutes (11-1/2 hours) after the first Zone 3 window, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 11:30 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-18:30 for 3-1/2 hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for two hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-33

85 Percentage of Worked Hours Before Zone: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) before the Zone Window compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 13:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 15:00 hours. With the qualification rule based on percentage of hours worked before zone, the employee must work greater than or equal to 25% before zone to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 25% before zone to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 120 minutes (two hours) before the Zone 2 window, therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of worked hours before the Zone Window are 2 (hours)/15 (hours) =.13 X 100 = 13%. The employee worked a total of 540 minutes (nine hours) before Zone 3 window, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours because the percentage of worked hours before the Zone Window are 9 (hours)/15 (hours) =.6 X 100 = 60%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 9:00 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 6:00 Zone 1 hours come from 13:00-15:00 for two hours in Zone 1, 15:00-22:00 for seven hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-4:00 for six hours in Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

86 Percentage of Punch Before Zone: Award hours are based on the time difference between the First IN punch (without breaks) and the Zone Window Start Time compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 12:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 16:00 hours. With the qualification rule based on percentage of punched before zone, the employee must punch IN greater than or equal to 30% before the zone Start Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 15% before the zone Start Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched IN 180 minutes (3 hours) before the zone Start Time, therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of time between First IN and the Zone Window Start Time is 3 (hours)/16 (hours) =.187 X 100 = 18.7%. The employee punched IN 600 minutes (ten hours) before the zone Start Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours because the percentage of time between First IN and the Zone Window Start Time is 10 (hours)/16 (hours) =.625 X 100 = 62.5%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 10:00 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 6:00 Zone 1 hours come from 12:00-15:00 for three hours in Zone 1, 15:00-22:00 for seven hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 22:00-4:00 for six hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-35

87 Percentage of Worked Hours Within Zone: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) within the Zone Window compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 4:00 the next day for a total of 23:00 hours. With the qualification rule based on percentage of hours worked within the zone, the employee must work greater than or equal to 25% within the Zone Window to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 75% within the Zone Window to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee worked a total of 420 minutes (seven hours) within the Zone Window, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of worked hours within the Zone Window are 7 (hours)/23 (hours) =.304 X 100 = 30.4%. The employee worked a total of 120 minutes (two hours) within the first Zone 3, therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 3 hours because the percentage of worked hours within the Zone Window is 2 (hours)/23 (hours) =.086 X 100 = 8.6%. The employee worked a total of 360 minutes (six hours) within second Zone 3, therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 3 hours because the percentage of worked hours within the Zone Window is 6 (hours)/23 (hours) =.26 X 100 = 26%. All Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 16:00 Zone 2 REG 7:00 Zone 3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 5:00-7:00 for two hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1, and 22:00-4:00 for six hours from the first Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-22:00 for seven hours in Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

88 Percentage of Punch After Zone: Award hours are based on the time difference between the Last OUT punch (without breaks) and the Zone Window End Time compared to the value in the qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 18:30 for a total of 13:30 hours. With the qualification rule based on percentage of punched after the zone, the employee must punch OUT greater than or equal to 75% after the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 50% after the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee did not punch OUT after the Zone 2 End Time, therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of hours after Zone 2 End Time is 0 (hours)/13-1/2 (hours) = 0 X 100 = 0%. The employee punched OUT 690 minutes (11-1/2 hours) after the Zone 3 End Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours because the percentage of hours after Zone 3 End Time is 11-1/2 (hours) / 13-1/2 (hours) =.851 X 100 = 85.1%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution: Zone 1 REG 11:30 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-18:30 for 3-1/2 hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for two hours in Zone 3. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-37

89 Percentage of Worked Hours After Zone: Award hours are based on the hours worked (with breaks) after your Zone Window compared to the value in qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 5:00 and OUT at 18:30 for a total of 13:30 hours. With the qualification rule base on percentage of hours worked after Zone Window, the employee must work greater than or equal to 50% after the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 60% after the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee did not work any hours after the Zone 2 End Time, therefore the employee does not qualify for Zone 2 hours because percentage of hours after Zone 2 End Time are 0 (hours)/13-1/2 (hours) = 0 X 100 = 0%. The employee worked 690 minutes (11-1/2 hours) after the Zone 3 End Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 3 hours because the percentage of hours after Zone 3 End Time are 11-1/2 (hours)/13-1/2 (hours) =.851 X 100 = 85.1%. All Zone 2 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 11:30 Zone 2 REG No Hours Zone 3 REG 2:00 Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-15:00 for eight hours in Zone 1, 15:00-18:30 for 3-1/2 hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 3 hours come from 5:00-7:00 for 2:00 in Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

90 Percentage of Hours from In Punch after Zone Start: Award hours are based on the time difference between First IN punch (without breaks) and Zone Window Start Time as long as the First IN punch is after the Zone Window Start Time compared to the value in qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 16:00 and OUT at 2:00 the next day for a total of 10:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on percentage of punched IN after the Zone Window Start Time, the employee must punch IN greater than or equal to 5% after the Zone Window Start Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 5% after the Zone Window Start Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched IN 60 minutes (one hour) after the Zone 2 Start Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of time between First IN and the schedule Start Time is 1 (hour)/ 0 (hours) =.01 X 100 = 10%. The employee did not punch IN after Zone 3 Start Time, therefore he does not qualify for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 4:00 Zone 2 REG 6:00 Zone 3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 22:00-2:00 for four hours in Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1, 16:00-22:00 for seven hours from Zone 2 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 16:00-22:00 for six hours in Zone 2. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-39

91 Percentage of Hours from Out Punch before Zone End: Award hours are based on the time difference between Last OUT punch (without breaks) and Zone Window End Time as long as the Last OUT punch is before the Zone Window End Time compared to the value in qualification rules. In this case the value is a percentage of these hours and the total hours for the day. In this example, the employee punches IN at 23:00 the previous day and OUT at 20:00 for a total of 21:00 hours. With the qualification rule base on percentage of punched OUT before the Zone Window End Time, the employee must punch OUT greater than or equal to 5% before the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 2 hours and 5% before the Zone Window End Time to qualify for Zone 3 hours. The employee punched OUT 120 minutes (two hours) before the Zone 2 End Time, therefore the employee qualifies for Zone 2 hours because the percentage of time between the OUT punch and Zone 2 End Time is 2 (hours)/21 (hours) =.095 X 100 = 9.5%. The employee did not punch OUT before Zone 3 End Time; therefore does not qualify for Zone 3 hours. All Zone 3 hours will go to the default Zone Code, which in this case would be Zone 1. The hours distribution is: Zone 1 REG 16:00 Zone 2 REG 5:00 Zone 3 REG No Hours Zone 1 hours come from 7:00-14:00 for seven hours in Zone 1, 23:00-7:00 for eight hours from Zone 3 defaulting to Zone 1. Zone 2 hours come from 15:00-20:00 for five hours in Zone TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

92 Break/Lunch This Section Describes How To: Add an Auto Break Period Save the Auto Break Settings Delete an Auto Break Period Print a List of Auto Break Period Settings The Break/Lunch window is used to set the Auto Break parameters. When a Break/Lunch is assigned to an employee, TruTime will automatically compare the employee s schedule to the Auto Break parameters set in this window and if applicable, deduct the time of that employee for the break or lunch period. This window is accessed by selecting the Break/Lunch menu item in the File Maintenance tab. To Add an Auto Break Period Perform the following to create an Auto Break period: 1. In the Break/Lunch window, select the Add command from the Record menu. This will clear all the fields in the window and place the cursor in the Auto Break Number field. 2. In the Auto Break No. field, enter in a number, 1 thru 9, that will correspond to this Auto Break period when setting up employee schedules and schedule templates. 3. In the Auto Break Abbreviation field, enter in a description (up to ten alphanumeric characters) of the Auto Break period. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-41

93 4. For Hours Continuous, you must select how an employee s daily IN and OUT punch activity will determine the conditions that execute the Auto Break deduction. Yes: A minimum number of continuous hours (no IN or OUT punches) must be worked before a break or lunch can be taken. This number must be entered in the Min hours to Work field in the corresponding Flex Zone. (These Flex Zones correspond to the Flex Zone columns in the Individual and Template Schedules windows.) For example, if the minimum hours worked = 4 and Deduct Hours = 1/2 hour, an employee must work for four uninterrupted hours (no IN or OUT punches) before the half hour will be deducted. This option is for employees with breaks that must be taken at an assigned time. No: The minimum requirement for time worked does not need to be continuous before a break or lunch can be taken. In this case, enter the minimum number of hours required for the entire day in the Min Hours to Work field. For example, if the minimum hours worked = 8 and Deduct Hours = 1/2 hour, an employee has to work eight or more hours (between the First IN and the Last OUT punch of the day), before the half hour will be deducted. If IN or OUT punches have occurred during the day, TruTime will compare the time not worked to the time allotted for the break. The half hour of allotted break time will be deducted if the time not worked is less than or equal to a half hour. If the time not worked is more than a half hour, the total time not worked will be deducted. This option is for employees whose schedules have flexible breaks which may be taken at any point within a specified block of time. 5. In the Flex Zone 1 group box, enter in the minimum number of hours an employee must work before TruTime will deduct a break, based on your Hours Continuous selection for time worked in the Minimum Hours to Work field. 6. In the Deduct Hours field, enter the amount of time the employee is permitted for a break or lunch. 7. Select the Break Type. The choices are Break or Lunch. 8. Select the Pay Method. This setting controls whether the break time will be deducted or not deducted from the employee s total paid hours. The choices are Unpaid (Deduct) or Paid (No Deduction). 9. In the Net Rounding Unit and Point fields, enter in the values that TruTime will use to round the entire break or lunch period instead of rounding individual punches. This will prevent employees from taking excess time during breaks or lunches. If the Unit and Point fields are left blank, the Time Rounding rules set in the Pay Class window will be used. When Net Rounding is applied to a break period, the first Unit measurement begins at the actual punch time. If the employee punches in after the allotted time has expired, the IN punch will be rounded using the Unit or Point entered here. (Refer to the explanation of Time Rounding in the Pay Class section of Chapter 2.) 10. Check Deduct if Break Not Taken if you want TruTime to automatically deduct the break time even if no break or lunch punches occur. If unchecked, break punches must occur in order for the break to be deducted. If no punches occur for a break, the break will not be deducted. 11. Repeat steps 5 thru 10 for the remaining Flex Zones. Up to four separate Flex Zones can be defined for breaks. These Flex Zones correspond to the Flex Zone columns in the Individual and Template Schedules windows. If your company s employees must punch for lunch or breaks, the Flex Zones can be set up to record employee s punches and report on exceptions. 12. Save settings TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

94 Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting to the File Maintenance tab. To Delete an Auto Break Period Perform the following to delete a break or lunch period: 1. In the Break/Lunch window, select an Auto Break period from the drop down list in the text box on the toolbar. The Auto Break period will be highlighted. 2. Select the Delete command from the Record menu. 3. A warning message will appear asking if you want to delete this Auto Break period. Click on the OK button or press the Enter key. 4. Save settings. Printing Out a List of Auto Break Periods To print out a list of your Auto Break periods, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. A print preview of this list will appear on your screen. To send this list to your system s printer, click on the Print button on the preview window's border. To change your printer settings, select the Print Setup command from the File menu. A Windows Print Setup dialog box will appear. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-43

95 Template Schedule This Section Describes How To: Create a Template Schedule Save Your Data Delete a Template Schedule Print a List of Template Schedules A Template Schedule is a basic schedule that includes a Start Time, End Time, and an Auto Break period. Template Schedules are used in the Auto Schedule, Employee Master and TruScheduler modules. Templates Schedules are created in the Template Schedule window, which is accessed by selecting the Template Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. After one schedule has been set up, you can use the Copy and Paste commands to apply the same settings to other schedules however you should never skip spaces when creating a new schedule. Creating A Template Schedule Perform the following to create a Template Schedule : 1. In the Abbreviation field, enter in a description (up to twenty alphanumeric characters) for the schedule. 2. Enter in a Start Time for the schedule (in 24 hour format) in the Start Time field. 3. Enter in an End Time for the schedule (in 24 hour format) in the End Time field. 4. Enter in the Pay Code for the schedule in the Pay Code field. 5. Enter in an Zone Differential for the schedule in the Zone Diff. field. 6. In the Auto Break field, select an Auto Break from the drop down list in the text box on the toolbar. Auto Break periods are created in the Lunch/Break window. 7. When using Fixed Lunch enter a Start and End Time (in 24 hour format) for the lunch period in the Fixed Lunch Start and End fields. The elapsed amount of time between the Start and End Times will be deducted from the employee s total hours worked. If the employee accrues any additional lunch time other than what is specified here (punches OUT or IN) the additional lunch time will be deducted. In most cases a template will have either a Auto Break or Fixed Lunch, not both. 8. To setup Flex Zones for the Auto Break deducted, enter in a Start and End Time (in 24 hour format) in the appropriate Flex Zone Start and End Time fields. An Auto Break period must be assigned to the schedule to assign Flex Zones TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

96 9. If you want to provide additional time to an employees Lunch or Break it can be done by entering the amount in the Flex Grace Lunch or Flex Grace Break field. This amount will then be added to the time in the Break/Lunch. This feature can be used to allow employees additional time on a specific day of the week to visit their bank or run company errands without receiving an LLI (Late Lunch In) exception or having time deducted. 10. If the template requires a different Day Change Time or Day Change Override, other than that assigned to the employee in their respective Pay Class, it can be entered here. TruTime will use the time entered in is field to override the time assigned in the Pay Class. 11. Save settings. Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting to the Schedules tab. Deleting a Template Schedule To delete a Template Schedule, select the row that the schedule appears in or select a schedule from the drop down list in the text box. When the schedule is highlighted, select the Clear Row command from the Edit menu. It is recommend that you enter the word HOLD in the Abbreviation field of a deleted template to assure that there are no spaces between templates. Printing Out a List of Template Schedules To print out a list of your Template Schedules, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. A Print Range dialog box will appear. Select the range of Template Schedules to include in the report using the From and To drop down lists. To change your printer settings, select the Print Setup command. A Windows Print Setup dialog box will appear. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-45

97 A print preview containing a list of your Template Schedules will be displayed. To send this list to your system s printer, click on the Print button on the preview window s border TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

98 Auto Schedule This Section Describes How To: Create an Auto Schedule Save Your Data Print a List of Auto Schedules An Auto Schedule is automatically assigned to an employee and based on the employee s First IN punch. Auto Schedules consist of a Start Time and an assigned Template Schedule. Auto Schedules are created in the Auto Schedule window, which is accessed by selecting the Auto Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. Creating an Auto Schedule Perform the following to create an Auto Schedule: 1. In the Auto Schedule window, select the Add command from the Record menu. This will clear all the fields in the window and place the cursor in the Auto Schedule No. field. 2. In the Auto Schedule No. field, enter in a number 1 thru 20, these numbers should be assigned in sequential order starting with In the Auto Schedule Name field, enter in a name (up to ten alphanumeric characters) for this schedule. 4. In the first Start Time field, enter in the time (in 24 hour format) that the schedule is to be applied. It is recommend that Start Times be a minimum of 3 hours apart so that employees will be assigned to the correct template. In the display above, any punch between 7:00 and 13:59 will be applied to the MORNING Template, any punch between 14:00 and 7:00 will go to the LATE Template. 5. In the first Template Schedule field, select a Template Schedule from the drop down list that you want to assign to the Start Time. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add Start Times and Template Schedules to this Auto Schedule as needed. 7. Select the Lock In Schedule that will be used for this schedule from the drop down list in the Lock In Schedule field. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-47

99 Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting to the Schedules tab. Printing Out a List of Auto Schedules To print out a list of your Auto Schedules, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. A Print Range dialog box will appear. Select the range of Auto Schedules to include in the report using the From and To drop down lists. To change your printer settings, select the Print Setup command. A Windows Print Setup dialog will appear. Once you have made your selections, click on the OK button. A print preview containing a list of your Auto Schedules will appear on your screen. To send this list to your system s printer, click on the Print button on the preview window s border TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

100 Individual Schedule This Section Describes How To: Create an Individual Schedule Save Your Data Print Out an Individual Schedule Globally Apply Individual Schedule The Individual Schedule window enables you to create a schedule for individual employees for a selected Pay Period. The Individual Schedule window is accessed by selecting the Individual Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. Creating an Individual Schedule Perform the following to create an Individual Schedule: 1. Select the Individual Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. 2. Enter in the Employee Number or Name, or select the employee from the list that you want to create an Individual Schedule for. You can sort the employee list by First Name, Last Name, Short Name, Cost Center, Department, or Job Class using the drop down lists provided. 3. From the Period drop down list, select the Pay Period that you wish to create an individual exception schedule for. The choices are; Previous, Current, or Next 2 thru 8 depending on the number entered in the No. of Pay Periods to Schedule drop-down list in the System Configuration module. 4. Click on the OK button to view the existing schedule for the selected employee. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-49

101 5. In the desired day s Pay Code field, select a Pay Code that will be used for that day from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. The Pay Code selected for this field will be applied to the employee s hours. 6. In the Zone Diff. field, select a Zone Differential that will be used for that day from the drop down list or toolbar. The Zone Differential selected for this field will be applied to the employee s hours. 7. In the Start Time field, enter in the employee s Start Time (in 24 hour format) for the day. 8. In the narrow fields preceding the Start and End Time fields, you must specify if the Start and End Times are assigned to the Next, or Previous day. To make a selection, click on each field, and select the applicable option from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. 9. In the End Time field, enter in the employee s End Time (in 24 hour format) for the day. 10. In the Lockout Schedule field, select the Lockout Schedule that will be used for the day from the drop down list in the text box of the toolbar. 11. In the Cost Center field, select a Cost Center that will be used for that day from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. The Cost Center selected for this field will be applied to the employee s hours. If this field is left blank, the Cost Center that is assigned in the Employee Master file will be applied. 12. In the Department field, select a Department that will be used for that day from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. The Department selected for this field will be applied to the employee s hours. If this field is left blank, the Department that is assigned in the Employee Master file will be applied. 13. In the Job Class field, select a Job Class that will be used for that day from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. The Job Class selected for this field will be applied to the employee s hours. If this field is left blank, the Job Class that is assigned in the Employee Master file will be applied. 14. In the Auto Break field, select the Auto Break period that will be used for the day from the drop down list in the text box of the toolbar. If this field is left blank, the Auto Break period that is assigned in the Auto Schedule for this day will be applied. 15. If the employee is assigned a Fixed Lunch period, and you wish to modify it from the period assigned in the Auto Schedule, you must enter a Start and End Time (in 24 hour format) for the lunch period in the Fixed Lunch Start and End fields. 16. To set the Flex Zones of the Auto Break period used, enter in a Start and End Time (in 24 hour format) in the appropriate Flex Zone Start and End Time fields. An Auto Break period must be assigned to the schedule to modify a Flex Zone. 17. If you want to add time (in minutes) to a scheduled break and lunch time, select the Flex Grace Break/Lunch field. Enter a time (in minutes) in the text box on the toolbar. 18. Repeat steps 5 thru 17 for the days required. After the schedule for one day has been set, you can use the Cut and Paste commands to apply the same schedule to other days in the Pay Period. 19. Save settings TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

102 Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting. Printing Out a List of Individual Schedules To print out a list of your Individual Schedules, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. A Print Range dialog box will appear. Select the range of Individual Schedules by employee using the From and To drop down lists, and select the date range for the schedules using the Start and End Date fields. To change your printer settings, select the Print Setup command. A Windows Print Setup dialog will appear. Once you have made your selections, click on the OK button. A print preview containing a list of your Individual Schedules will appear on your screen. To send this list to your system s printer, click on the Print button on the preview window s border. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-51

103 Globally Apply Individual Schedules This feature allows you to apply an Individual Schedule created for one employee to all or a selected range of employees. To globally apply the Individual Schedule, perform the following: 1. Click on the Global button in the toolbar. 2. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the OK button to continue. The Global Selection Criteria window will appear. 3. Click on All or Select to choose the Cost Centers, Departments, Job Classes, and Employees you wish to apply the schedule to. 4. Select the Pay Classes to apply the schedule to. Only those Pay Classes that include the same Pay Period and Start Date as the current employee s individual schedule will be available. 5. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Apply button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on Yes to use the Cost Center, Department, and Job Class specified in the Employee Master file for each employee, or No to use the Cost Center, Department, and Job Classes specified in the Individual Schedule. 6. A confirmation dialog box will appear listing all employees for whom schedules will be globally adjusted. Click on the OK button if the information is correct or Cancel to return to the Global Selection Criteria window TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

104 Schedule Rotation The Schedule Rotation window is used to rotate schedules assigned in the Individual Schedule module based on Pay Class. The Schedule Rotation window is accessed by selecting the Schedule Rotation menu item in the Data Processing tab. To rotate Pay Class Schedules, perform the following: 1. In the list box of the Schedule Rotation window, select the desired Pay Class to rotate. For multiple Pay Classes, hold down the Ctrl key while clicking on the each item. 2. Click on the P-C-N Execute button in the toolbar. A message box will appear to verify the Schedule Rotation. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-53

105 Advance Schedule This Section Describes How To: Create an Advance Schedule Save Your Data Print a List of Advance Schedules Globally Apply Advance Schedules The Advance Schedule window is used to schedule an individual employee s time off. This typically includes vacation, jury duty, leave of absence or other predetermined paid or unpaid time off. The Advance Schedule window is accessed by selecting the Advance Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. Creating an Advance Schedule Perform the following to create an Advance Schedule: 1. Select the Advance Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. A Select Employee window will appear. 2. Enter in the Employee Number or Name, or select the employee from the list that you want to create an Advance Schedule for. You can sort the employee list by First Name, Last Name, Short Name, Cost Center, Department, or Job Class using the drop down lists provided. 3. Click on the OK button to view the existing schedule for the selected employee. 4. Select the Add Advance Schedule command from the Edit menu. A blank schedule will appear. 5. Select the Schedule Date field, and enter in the Time Off Date in mm/dd/yyyy format) in the text box in the toolbar. 6. In the desired day s Pay Code field, select a Pay Code that will be used for that day from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. 7. In the Zone Diff. field, select a Zone Differential that will be used for that day from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. 8. In the No. of Hours field, enter in the number of hours the employee will be off work in the date specified in the Schedule Date field TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

106 9. In the Pay in Advance field, select how the time off hours will be paid using the drop down list in the text box of the toolbar. Yes will apply the scheduled time off to the Pay Date and No will apply the scheduled time off to the Schedule Date. 10. Repeat steps 6 thru 10 for the days required. After the schedule for one day has been set, you can use the Cut and Paste commands to apply the same schedule to other days. 11. Save settings. Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting to the Schedules tab. Printing Out a List of Advance Schedules To print out a list of your Advance Schedules, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. A Print Range dialog box will appear. Select the range of Advance Schedules by employee using the From and To drop down lists, and select the date range for the schedules using the Start and End Date fields. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-55

107 To change your printer settings, select the Print Setup command. A Windows Print Setup dialog will appear. Once made your selections, click on the OK button. A print preview containing a list of your Advance Schedules will appear on your screen. To send this list to your system s printer, click on the Print button on the preview window s border TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

108 Globally Apply Advance Schedules This feature allows you to apply an Advance Schedule created for one employee to all or a selected range of employees. To globally apply the Advance Schedule, perform the following: 1. Click on the Global button in the toolbar. 2. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the Yes button to continue. The Global Selection Criteria window will appear. 3. Click on All or Select to choose the Cost Centers, Departments, Job Classes, and Employees that you wish to apply the schedule. 4. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Apply button. 5. A confirmation dialog box will appear listing all employees for whom schedules will be globally adjusted. Click on the OK button if the information is correct or Cancel to return to the Global Selection Criteria window. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-57

109 Standby Schedule This Section Describes How To: Create a Standby Schedule Save Your Data Print Out a List of Standby Schedules The Standby Schedule window enables you to pre-schedule employees to be on standby status. The Standby Schedule window is accessed by selecting the Standby Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. Creating a Standby Schedule Perform the following to create a Standby Schedule: 1. Select the Standby Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. A Range window will appear TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

110 2. Enter in the Employee Number or Name, or select the employee from the list that you want to create a Standby Schedule for. You can sort the employee list by First Name, Last Name, Short Name, Cost Center, Department, or Job Class using the drop down lists provided. 3. From the Period drop down list, select the Pay Period that you wish to create the Standby Schedule for. The choices are; Previous, Current, or Next 2 thru 8 periods. 4. Click on the OK button to create a Standby Schedule for the selected employee. 5. In the desired Start Time field, enter in the employee s Start Time (in 24 hour format) for the day. 6. In the desired day s Pay Code field, select a Pay Code that will be used for that day from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. 7. In the Zone Code field, select a Zone Differential that will be used for that day from the drop down list of the text box on the toolbar. 8. In the No. of Hours field, enter in the number of hours the employee will be paid on standby. 9. Repeat steps 5 thru 8 for the days required. After the schedule for one day has been set, you can use the Cut and Paste commands to apply the same schedule to other days in the Pay Period. Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting to the Schedules tab. Printing Out a List of Standby Schedules To print out a list of your Standby Schedules, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. A Print Range dialog box will appear. Select the range of Standby Schedules by employee using the From and To drop down lists, and select the date range for the schedules using the Start and End Date fields. To change your printer settings, select the Print Setup command. A Windows Print Setup dialog will appear. Once made your selections, click on the OK button. A print preview containing a list of your Standby Schedules will appear on your screen. To send this list to your system s printer, click on the Print button on the preview window s border. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-59

111 Lockin Schedule A Lockin Schedule is a set of four time zones that employees will be permitted to punch in at the data collection terminals. Employees assigned to a Lockin Schedule will be permitted to clock in only during the time zones specified. If an employee attempts to punch in outside the time zones specified, the employee will be prevented from punching in. Lockin Schedules are assigned to employee s schedules in the Individual Schedule and Auto Schedule modules. Lockin Schedules are created in the Lockin Schedule window, which is accessed by selecting the Lockin Schedule menu item in the Schedules tab. Creating a Lockin Schedule Perform the following to create a Lockin Schedule: 1. In the Lockin Schedule window, select the Add command from the Record menu. This will clear all the fields in the window and place the cursor in the Lockin Schedule Name field. 2. Enter in a name (up to ten alphanumeric characters) for the Lockin Schedule in the Lockin Schedule Name field. 3. In the Zone 1 Start and End Time fields, enter the Start and End Times (in 24 hour format) for the zone. Employees assigned to this Lockin Schedule will be permitted to clock in only during the time specified in these fields. 4. Repeat step 3 to add Zone Start and End Times as required for the remaining zones. Note: Zones cannot overlap midnight. 5. Save settings. Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting to the Schedules tab TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

112 TruScheduler This Section Describes How To: Create a Profile Select an Existing Profile Modify an Existing Profile Create A Schedule Template Assign A Schedule Template Manually Schedule an Employee Schedule an Employee for an Off Day Schedule an Employee for an Absence Copy and Paste Schedules Customize the Schedule Grid Printing a Schedule Posting Report TruScheduler is an enhanced version of the Individual Schedule. It accomplishes the same basic tasks as the Individual Schedule, but in a more user friendly, simple, and intuitive way. Like the Individual Schedule, the graphical interface of TruScheduler is a grid representing the employee s schedule, and employee schedules can be displayed or modified for a selectable range of dates for selected employees. Each cell in the grid represents one workday for an employee. These cells can easily be modified to reflect an addition, deletion, or modification to an employee's schedule. If you have been accustomed to using Individual Schedule and Advanced Schedule you can still use those scheduling techniques just as you have in the past. Or, if you prefer to use the new method in TruScheduler, you can do that instead. If you are going to change over to the TruScheduler, you can even use both schedulers to help you through the transition period. TruScheduler is accessed by selecting the TruScheduler menu item in the Schedules tab. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-61

113 Creating a Profile Creating a Profile allows the user to select a specific date range and employee(s) range for quick and easy viewing and scheduling. For example, creating a profile for all employees for the current Pay Period will allow the user to quickly display a schedule grid for that criteria the next time scheduling is necessary. Once multiple Profiles have been created, the user can quickly choose a pre-configured Profile. Also, only the Profiles that are created under your User ID will be available to you. For instance, if you create three schedule Profiles, only you will have access to them. The Profile Manager window displays all profiles available for the current user. To create a Profile you must: Click on the New button in the toolbar of the Profile Manager window. The Range window will appear: Select the employees that are to be scheduled in the Employees tab of the Range window. Select the date range you wish to schedule under the Date Range tab of the Range window. Assign a name to the Profile you are creating in the Save as field TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

114 Selecting an Employee Range: In the Employees tab of the Range window, select the employees in the desired Cost Centers, Departments, Job Classes, or Pay Classes that you wish to schedule. For example, if you would like to schedule all of your hourly workers, you would highlight the Hourly Cost Center. If there are specific employees you would like to schedule, you can instead click the Employee button and select those employees. Multiple employees can be selected by holding the CTRL key while selecting employees. Selecting a Date Range: There are several different choices for selecting the appropriate date range. They are: Current Pay Period: Displays current Pay Period for the Pay Class selected. For example, if all salaried workers are on a Bi-Weekly Pay Period, then selecting Current Pay Period and salaried as the Pay Class will display a schedule grid that displays the Current Pay Period dates for salaried workers. Previous Pay Period: Displays the Previous Pay Period for the Pay Class selected. Next n Pay Periods: Displays the Next n (number of) Pay Periods. For instance, if you would like to schedule the next four Pay Periods (eight weeks, assuming a bi-weekly pay period), simply select Next n Pay Periods, the appropriate Pay Class, and enter 4 in the Next n field. Today: This will display a schedule grid for just the current day. Yesterday: This will display a schedule grid for yesterday only. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-63

115 Current Week: This will display a schedule grid consisting of the current week s dates from Sunday to Saturday. For example, if today is Wednesday, February 9, 2000 then selecting Current Week will display a schedule grid from Sunday, February 6, 2000 to Saturday, February 12, Last Week: This option will display a schedule grid for the previous week from Sunday to Saturday. For instance, if today is Wednesday, February 9, 2000 then selecting Last Week will display the date range of Sunday, January 30, 2000 to Saturday, February 5, Next n Weeks: This selection will display the Next n Weeks that is specified by the user. The schedule grid will always display a grid starting on Sunday and ending on Saturday. For instance, if the user wants to schedule for the next 4 weeks, and today is Wednesday, February 9, 2000, the schedule grid will display a range from Sunday, February 13, 2000 to Saturday, March 11, Date Range: This option allows the user to select a custom date range. When this option is selected, the date range calendar is available as well as the Next and Back selection boxes. For example, if the user would like to schedule employees from Wednesday, February 16, 2000 to Tuesday, February 29, 2000, those dates can be input into the Start On and End fields. The user can also set the date range to display a schedule grid for the next or previous days, weeks, or months. This would be useful in cases where you want to schedule for the next 15 days or next 3 months, for example. Naming a Profile: Selecting a name for your Profile will save the employee selection and date criteria previously configured. This is useful because the next time you wish to display a schedule grid with the same criteria, a Profile will already be available. For example, if you always schedule your hourly workers by the month, then you could create a profile called Next Months Hourly and now that profile will be available for easy use the next time you are ready to schedule your hourly workers for the next month. Once you have completed the before mentioned steps, click the OK button and a schedule grid will be displayed with the criteria you have chosen. You are now ready to start scheduling your employees. Selecting an Existing Profile Once a Profile has been created it can be opened in the Profile Manager window by double-clicking on it. The Profile, which contains employee and date information, will now be displayed on-screen in the schedule grid TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

116 Modifying an Existing Profile Once a Profile has been created, it can be modified from the Profile Manager window by highlighting the desired item and clicking the Edit button. Creating a Schedule Template Once you have opened a Profile you will see a schedule grid with dates running across the top row and employees down the far left-hand column. You can begin to schedule your employees by creating a Schedule Template. Schedule Templates aid in the scheduling process by making it easy to schedule for common shifts. Once created, these templates can then be used to schedule your employees during the scheduling process. For example, company ABC has 2 shifts that employees work, the morning (8:00 am to 3:00 pm) and the evening (3:00 pm to 11:00 pm). In order to make the scheduling process quicker, you could create a morning and evening template. This template can now be assigned to an employee on any given day in the grid. To create or modify a new schedule template, click on the Folder button in the toolbar of the schedule grid. The following window will appear: TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-65

117 Click on the New button and the following blank schedule template will be displayed: Selecting Individual Schedule Parameters: Enter the following information into the fields of the Individual tab of the Template Schedule window: Pay Code: Select the appropriate Pay Code that hours should be attributed to. For instance, if workers for the morning shift get paid regular pay, select the REG Pay Code. Zone: Select the appropriate zone for the template. Start Time: Enter the Start Time of the shift (in 24 hour format) and select which day the shift starts. For example, if the shift starts at 9:00 am, enter 0900 and select C (Current day) from the list. Select P (Previous day) or N (Next day) if the shifts start on the day before or the day after the current date. End Time: Enter the End Time of the shift (in 24 hour format) and select which day the shift ends. For example, if the shift ends at 8:00 pm today, enter 2000 and select C (Current day) from the list. Select N (Next day) if your shift ends tomorrow (after midnight). Cost Center, Department, and Job Class: Select the Cost Center, Department, and Job Class that the hours worked should be attributed. These fields can be left "blank." Leaving these fields blank will attribute any hours worked to each employee assigned Cost Center, Department, and Job Class in Employee Master. LockIn Schedule: If you need to assign a LockIn schedule for the schedule template, do so here. This field will usually be left blank unless you are prohibiting employees from punching at the terminal during certain hours of the day TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

118 Selecting Break and Lunch Rules: The Break tab of the Template Schedule window contains several optional fields that can be used if you are using pre-configured break and lunch rules. Auto Break: Select the appropriate Auto Break period from the drop down menu. Fixed Lunch: If employees on this shift template can only take lunch during fixed times, complete the fixed Start and End fields (in 24 hour format). For example, if the lunch times for hourly line workers are 12:00 pm to 1:00 pm, then 1200 and 1300 should be entered in these fields. This field should only be completed when exact Start and End Times for lunch breaks are mandated. Flex Zones: Input the times for the Flex Zones 1 thru 4 where necessary. Flex Break Grace: Enter the time (in minutes) that an employee can extend their break without being penalized. Flex Lunch Grace: Enter the time (in minutes) that an employee can extend their lunch without being penalized. Saving the Schedule Template: In the Template Name field, enter a name such as MORNING SHIFT for the template you just configured and click on the OK button. This will save the current template with the given name, and enable the MORNING SHIFT template to be available for use in scheduling employees on the morning shift. Modifying or Deleting an Existing Schedule Template: A Schedule Template can easily be modified at a later date by clicking on the Edit button in the toolbar of the Edit Template window. Any information that was entered can now be modified. A template can also be deleted if it is no longer needed by highlighting the desired template and clicking on the Delete button in the toolbar of the Edit Template window. Assigning a Schedule Template Once a Schedule Template has been created, it can now be assigned to any employee for any day. This is done by highlighting a day (individual cell) or multiple cells, and then selecting the appropriate template from the drop down menu on the tool bar. Multiple cells can be selected by holding down the shift key. Templates create in the Template Module will also be displayed, if they have an assigned Pay Code and Zone Differential. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-67

119 Manually Scheduling an Employee (Without Templates) Employees can also be scheduled manually without the use of Schedule Templates. Manual scheduling is convenient when an employee(s) needs to be scheduled for a time that is not their normal shift time, or if a "special" shift is required for a particular employee. The methodology in manually scheduling employees is similar to creating a Schedule Template. To begin scheduling manually, double click on an individual cell in the grid. The following window will appear: Selecting Individual Schedule Parameters: Enter the following information into the fields of the Individual tab of the Edit Schedule window: Shift: Select Shift One or Two. The most common selection is Shift One. You would only select Shift Two if you already have scheduled that employee for a shift that day and you want to schedule another shift or second shift. When scheduling two shifts on the same day, the cell will divide into an upper and lower half. Pay Code: Select the appropriate Pay Code that hours should be attributed to. For instance, if workers for the morning shift get paid regular pay, select the REG Pay Code. Zone: Select the appropriate zone for the template. Start Time: Enter the Start Time of the shift (in 24 hour format) and select which day the shift starts. For example, if the shift starts at 9:00 am, enter 0900 and select C (Current day) from the list. Select P (Previous day) or N (Next day) if the shifts start on the day before or the day after the current date. End Time: Enter the End Time of the shift (in 24 hour format) and select which day the shift ends. For example, if the shift ends at 8:00 pm today, enter 2000 and select C (Current day) from the list. Select N (Next day) if your shift ends tomorrow (after midnight). Cost Center, Department, and Job Class: Select the Cost Center, Department, and Job Class that the hours worked should be attributed to. These fields can be left "blank." When left blank, the settings assigned in Employee Master will be used. LockIn Schedule: If you need to assign a LockIn schedule for the schedule template, do so here. This field will usually be left blank unless you are prohibiting employees from punching at the terminal during certain hours of the day TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

120 Selecting Break and Lunch Rules: The Break tab of the Edit Schedule window contains several fields that can optionally be completed if you are using pre-configured break and lunch rules. Auto Break: Select the appropriate Auto Break period from the drop down menu. Fixed Lunch: If employees on this shift template can only take lunch during fixed times, complete the fixed Start and End fields (in 24 hour format). For example, if the lunch times for hourly line workers are 12:00 pm to 1:00 pm, then 1200 and 1300 should be entered in these fields. This field should only be completed when exact Start and End Times for lunch breaks are mandated. Flex Zones: Input the times for the Flex Zones 1 thru 4 where necessary. Flex Break Grace: Enter the time in minutes that an employee can extend their break without being penalized. Flex Lunch Grace: Enter the time in minutes that an employee can extend their lunch without being penalized. Using the Advance Schedule: The Advance tab of the Edit Schedule window is used when you want to add or delete several hour types on the same day for a chosen employee. For example, you can add four hours of sick time, add four hours of vacation time, and delete four hours of regular time for that same day. If you want to add, change or remove one of those hour types, simply highlight the Pay Code to delete, and click the appropriate (Add, Change, or Remove) button. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-69

121 Scheduling an Employee for an Off Day In TruScheduler, an empty cell represents an off (non-working) day for that employee on that day. When this occurs, it means that the employee is not scheduled to work and will not be counted as absent. To schedule an employee for an off day with an existing schedule, perform the following: 1. Highlight the appropriate cell where you wish to schedule an off-day. If the cell is already blank, then that employee is already scheduled for an off day. 2. Right click on the desired cell, select the Delete command and then select one of the following options and click on the OK button after the selection. Shift One: This option will schedule off time for the first shift of the day. Shift Two: This option will schedule off time for the second shift of the day. This option applies only to days that contain "split" shifts, or days with two shifts. If there is a "split" shift on a particular day, the cell will be divided into an upper and lower half. Both: This option will remove both the first and second shift from the cell. This option only applies to days where there are both first and second shifts on one day TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

122 Scheduling an Employee for an Absence TruScheduler also allows you to schedule an employee for an absence. You will need to do this whenever an employee is scheduled to work, but is absent. To do so, perform the following: 1. Highlight the appropriate cell (day) where you wish to schedule the absence. 2. Right click on that cell and select the Schedule Absence option. Now select the appropriate nonworking Pay Code from the list of Pay Codes. For instance, if the employee is taking a sick day, select your sick Pay Code. 3. The following screen will appear. Fill in the appropriate fields below and click the OK button. Pay Code: Select the appropriate Pay Code if other than the one selected in step 2. Zone Code: Select the desired Zone Code. Hours: Type in the number of hours that the employee is taking for the Pay Code selected. For example if the employee is taking a full sick day, type in 0800 for eight hours. If the employee is taking half sick day, type in 0400 for four hours. Pay In Advance: If you wish to pay the employee in a Pay Period other than the current one, select a date in the Pay Period you wish to pay that employee. This field is only used in situations where you want to pay an employee ahead of the normal Pay Period in which they would be paid for that time. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-71

123 Copying and Pasting Schedules Once you have scheduled an employee for a particular day or days, that schedule can be copied to another cell. Copying and pasting schedules allows you to schedule many employees much more quickly. To do so, perform the following: 1. Select the appropriate cell(s) that you wish to copy. Multiple cells can be selected by holding down the SHIFT key. 2. Select the Copy command from the File menu or press CTRL-C on the keyboard. 3. Select the cell or cells you wish to paste to and choose the Paste command from the File menu or press CTRL-V on the keyboard TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

124 Customizing the Schedule Grid TruScheduler has three customization options that allow the user to display schedule information in different ways to better accommodate the particular user. They are; Colors, Display, and Sort By options. These three options can be found by selecting any cell in the grid and right clicking. Colors: The Colors option allows the user to specify different color schemes for different scheduling situations. Regular: Select the color for "regular" schedules. Regular schedules are days (cells) in which there is a normal working-day schedule. Scheduled Time Off: Any scheduled absences such as vacation, sick, personal, etc. will be displayed with the color chosen. Holiday: All holidays that are configured in the Pay Class window will be displayed with the color selected. Multiple Schedules: If an employee has multiple schedules, it will be displayed in the chosen color. For example, multiple schedules could be days in which the employees was scheduled to work 9:00 am to 5:00 pm, but decided to take a vacation day. Once a vacation day has been scheduled on that same day, the text will be displayed in the color selected. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-73

125 Display: The Display option allows the user to select what employee information is to be displayed on the schedule grid. By default, Employee Number and Short Name are displayed. In addition to these two fields, the user can select any number of the following fields to display for each employee in the grid. Pay Class: Displays the Pay Class of the employee. Cost Center, Department, Job: Displays the employees assigned Cost Center, Department, and Job Pay Class. User Defined Fields: Displays the selected User Defined Fields Sort By: By default, employees are sorted by Employee Number but the sort order can be changed by selecting the sort by option. This is accomplished as follows: 1. Move the desired sorting fields in the Available Fields list to the Fields to sort by list by highlighting the fields and clicking on the > key, or use the >> key to select all the fields. 2. The sorting fields in the Fields to sort by list can be arranged in order by moving fields up or down by clicking the appropriate arrow. When finished arranging the sort order, click on the OK button TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

126 Printing a Schedule Posting Report To print out Schedule Posting Report, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. The report will be displayed to screen. This report displays scheduled information in week grids starting on Sunday and ending on Saturday. Employees are listed according badge number and short name. To print the report select the Print button, a Windows Print Setup dialog will appear. Click the OK button to print the report. TRUTIME / Schedule Setup 3-75

127 3-76 TRUTIME / Schedule Setup

128 Chapter 4: Employee Setup The Employee File Maintenance window (referred to as the Employee Master) is used to enter employee information in TruTime. The Employee Master is comprised of seven tabs; Basic Info, Auto Schedule, Benefit Time, Validation, User Defined Fields, Wage/Rates, and Accumulated Tips. This Chapter Includes: Basic Info Tab: Employee information is added, modified, or deleted in this tab. Auto Schedule Tab: This tab enables you to select the days of the week that an employee will have a predetermined schedule automatically applied. Benefit Time Tab: The Benefit Time tab is used to track and view the Pay Codes used for employee benefit time. Validation Tab: This tab enables you to create validation tables for each employee. User Defined Fields Tab: Up to ten custom, user defined fields can be added to the Employee Master. These fields can include additional employee information, such as branch locations, emergency phone numbers, and review dates. In addition, these fields can be used as sorting and filtering criteria. Wage/Rate Tab: The Wages/Rate tab is used to calculate employee wages for the hours worked. Accumulated Tips Tab: This tab tracks tips entered at data collection terminals or entered in the Edit Daily Data window. In this tab, you can view the Daily, Pay Period, and Year to Date Tip Totals, as well as set a date to reset the Pay Period and Year to Date totals. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-1

129 Basic Info Tab This Section Describes How To: Add an Employee Select an Existing Employee Modify Employee Information Delete an Employee Add Additional Employees using Save As Globally Apply Auto Schedule Print Employee Long, Short, and Benefit Time Lists Adding an Employee Employees are added to TruTime by creating an individual employee profile in the Employee Master. An Employee Number must be entered before the remainder of the employee information can be entered. Once assigned, an Employee Number cannot be changed. If an employee s information is modified, you will be prompted to save it before you can view another employee profile. To create an employee profile, perform the following: 1. Select the Employee Master menu item from the File Maintenance tab. A Select Employee window will appear. 2. Click on the New button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the OK button to continue. 3. A New Employee dialog box will appear. Enter a new Employee Number (maximum ten alphanumeric characters) and click on the OK button. 4-2 TRUTIME / Employee Setup

130 4. The Basic Info tab will appear: 5. In the fields provided, enter the following information: Badge Number: A Badge Number must be assigned when you add a new employee. Badge Numbers must not be a duplicate. AMX-10, ABX-10 and TC500 Terminals: Up to nine numeric characters. MJR-8150 Terminals: Up to five numeric characters. MTX Series Terminals: Up to nine alphanumeric characters. After you have entered the Badge Number, press the Tab key. First Name: Enter the employee s first name (up to fifteen characters). Press the Tab key. Last Name: Enter the employee s last name (up to twenty characters). Press the Tab key. Short Name: Enter an abbreviated name (up to 22 characters). If nothing is entered, TruTime will default the Short Name to the employee s last name and first initial. Press the Tab key. Cost Center, Department, and Job Class: Select from the drop down lists in each field, the Cost Center, Department, and Job Class that apply to the employee. An employee must be assigned to each one of these categories. These fields are used to group and categorize the distribution of employee labor hours for accounting, sorting, and reporting purposes. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-3

131 Pay Class: From the drop down list, select the Pay Class that applies to this employee. All employees must be assigned a Pay Class for accumulation of hours and application of pay rules. Pay Classes determine the calculation rules for a group of employees, and determine the employee s Pay Period, Overtime, Holiday schedule and Time Rounding options. (Terminal) Group: This field is used to assign an employee to a Group of ABX-10, AMX-10, TC-500, and MJR-8150 data collection terminals, and is for use only with these terminals. Groups are defined in the Group Set/Add tab of the Clock Maintenance window. Payroll ID Number: This number is assigned to an employee by a payroll service company. If you are not using an outside payroll company, you can use this field to assign a Payroll ID number (up to ten alphanumeric characters ) for use by your internal payroll department. Social Security No.: (Optional) Enter the employee s social security number. Telephone Number: (Optional) Enter the employee s telephone number. Date of Hire: (Optional) Enter the employee s hire date (dd/mm/yyyy). Birthday: (Optional) Enter the employee s date of birth (dd/mm/yyyy). Inactive Employee Status: When checked, this option makes an employee inactive. This employee will continue to be saved within the system, but will not interact with TruTime functions, unless specified in TruAccruals, or System Configuration. You must enter the date in which the employee became inactive in the field provided. Default Schedule/Lunch/Break: This group box is used to assign a Default Schedule to an employee by selecting a Template Schedule, Pay Code, and Zone Differential from the drop down lists provided. Pay To Schedule: If checked, the employee will be paid according to the assigned schedule, whether or not punches are recorded. If not checked, this employee will be paid according to the punches recorded. Pay To Schedule Hours: By default, the employee will be paid the number of hours defined in the assigned schedule. If you wish to override the schedule, enter the number of hours to pay the employee. Please note that this is the minimum number of hours. If the employee works more than this number, they will be paid according to the rules of the assigned Pay Class. Saving Your Data To save data entered, select the Save command from the File menu or select the Save button in the toolbar. You must save your settings before exiting the Employee Master. 4-4 TRUTIME / Employee Setup

132 Selecting An Existing Employee Existing employee information can be viewed using the following methods: Entering the Employee Master: 1. Select the Employee Master menu item in the File Maintenance tab. A Range window will appear. 2. Enter in the Employee Number or Name, or select employees from the given list that you want to display. You can sort the employee list by First Name, Last Name, Short Name, Cost Center, Department, or Job Class using the drop down lists provided. 3. Click on the OK button to view the existing employee information. Open Command: Existing employee information can be displayed while in the Employee Master by selecting the Open command from the File menu. If an employee s information is modified, you will be prompted to save it before you can view another employee profile. Browse Commands: Existing employee information can be displayed within the Employee Master using the,,, and buttons in the toolbar or by selecting the First, Previous, Next, and Last Record commands from the View menu. If an employee s information is modified, you will be prompted to save it before you can view another employee profile. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-5

133 Modifying Employee Information You can add or edit any of the fields located in the Employee Master except Employee, and Group Numbers, and information in the Benefit Time tab if TruAccruals is active. Some modifications to employee information may effect the calculation of employee hours. To add or edit employee information, perform the following: 1. Select and display the employee s information that you want to modify. 2. When you have completed adding or editing, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. 3. If you select the Exit command in the File menu without saving, you will be prompted to save your data. Click on the Yes button to save your data or No to exit without saving. Deleting an Employee It is recommended that employees be made inactive instead of deleting them from the Employee Master. Employee information can not be retrieved once the employee is deleted. To delete an employee, perform the following: 1. Select and display the employee s information that you want to delete. 2. With the employee s information in the display, select the Delete command from the File menu. 3. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the OK button or press the Enter key to delete the employee. Adding Additional Employees Using Save As After adding a new employee, other employees with similar profiles can be added using the Save As command. The Save As command copies all the Basic Information, Cost Center, Department, Job Class, Pay Class, and Group information from the employee just added to a new employee. The user will then be prompted to enter an Employee Number, Badge ID, Payroll ID, First and Last Name, Social Security No., Telephone, Hire, Birth, and Inactive Dates. Once an Employee Number is assigned, it cannot be changed. To add employees using the Save As command, perform the following: 1. Select and display the employee s information that you want to save as another employee. 2. With the employee s information in the display, select the Save As command from the File menu. A dialog box will appear: 3. Enter in the new Employee Number and the other information listed. 4. After all information has been entered, click the OK button or press the Enter key. 4-6 TRUTIME / Employee Setup

134 Globally Apply Employee Information This feature allows you to globally apply a selected employee profile to a desired group of employees. To globally apply the Employee Information, perform the following: 1. Enter in the employee information for the group that you want to globally apply to and save. 2. With the selected employee s information displayed, click on the Global button in the toolbar or select the Global Schedule command from the Edit menu. 3. The Apply Globally To dialog box will appear. Click on the OK button to continue. The Global Selection Criteria window will appear. 4. Select the items that you want to globally apply to the selected employees. 5. When you have finished making your selections, click on the OK button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on Yes to continue. 6. A confirmation dialog box will appear, listing all employees for whom schedules will be globally adjusted. Click on the OK button if the information is correct or Cancel to end the operation. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-7

135 Printing Employee Long, Short, Benefit or User Defined Fields Lists To print out a list of employee data contained in the Employee Master, perform the following: 1. Click on the Print button in the toolbar or select the Print command from the File menu. 2. A Print Selections dialog box will appear: 3. This dialog box enables you to select a range of employees by category (Departments, Cost Centers, Job Classes, Pay Classes, and Employees). This is accomplished by choosing Select for each item that you want in the range. For selecting multiple items in each category, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the desired items. To select all the employees, click on the All radio button. When selected, only employees assigned to those items will appear in the list. 4. Place a check next to the report type. The choices are: Long: This selection allows you to print out all the information stored in the Employee Master for the selected employee range. 4-8 TRUTIME / Employee Setup

136 Short: This selection allows you to print, for quick reference, specific information stored in the Employee Master for the selected employee range. Benefit: This selection will print the Benefit Time information of employees in the range. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-9

137 User Defined Fields: This selection will print the User Defined Fields information of employees in the range. 5. Place a check next to Inactive only (to print out inactive employees) or Active only (to print out active employees). If no selection is made, all the employees in the Employee Master will be printed. 6. Using the Sort field, select the item that the print out will be sorted by. The choices are; Employee #, Badge #, and Name. 7. Click on the Print button to generate the print out. An onscreen preview will appear. To output this list to your printer, click on the Printer button in the toolbar on the bottom of the window. To exit this preview, click on the Close button TRUTIME / Employee Setup

138 Auto Schedule Tab This Section Describes How To: Select the Eligible Days of the Week for Auto Schedule Assign an Auto Schedule to a Day of the Week Assign an Template Schedule to a Day of the Week Assign a Pay Code to a Day of the Week Assign a Zone to a Day of the Week This Auto Schedule tab allows you to assign a schedule based on an employee s first IN punch, and apply a predetermined or template schedule for each day of the week. The schedule can consist of multiple templates, one for each day of the week. The Template and Auto Schedules, Pay Codes, and Zone Differentials must be created prior to setting this option. Assigning A Weekly Schedule To assign a weekly schedule to an employee, perform the following: 1. Click on the first day of the week that you want to assign a schedule to the employee. 2. Select either the Auto Schedule or Template Schedule field for that day, and select the appropriate schedule that will be used from the drop down list. 3. In the Pay Code field for that day, select the appropriate Pay Code from the drop down list. 4. In the Zone Differentials field for that day, select the appropriate Zone Differentials that will be used from the drop down list. 5. Repeat steps 1 thru 4 for each day of the week that the employee will work. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-11

139 Benefit Time Tab This Section Describes How To: Set the Benefit Pay Codes to Track Set the Eligible Date View the Balance of Benefit Pay Codes Non-TruAccruals The Benefit Time tab is used to track or view up to five different nonworked, automatic pay Pay Codes used for employee benefit time. Selecting the Pay Codes to Track: Select the desired Pay Code from the drop down lists. Up to five different Pay Codes can be selected. Eligible Date: This field defines the date on which an employee will be eligible to receive hours for the assigned Pay Code. Dates are entered using dd/mm/yyyy format. (Eligible) Hours: This field displays the amount of Benefit Hours that are available to the employee for the Pay Code. Taken (Hours) : This field is a running total of Benefit Hours taken by the employee. This total is derived from Benefit Hours entered for an employee in the Edit Daily Data and Global Daily Data windows. Adjusted (Hours) : This field is used to manually adjust the Benefit Hours taken. Balance: This field is used to view remaining Benefit Hours TRUTIME / Employee Setup

140 Memo: The two user Memo fields allow you to enter any special instructions or comments for an employee. Up to twenty characters can be entered in each field. When assigning Benefit Time in Edit Daily Data, TruTime will compare the balance of hours remaining for the Pay Code defined. If there are not enough hours, TruTime will not allow you to save the adjustment. TruAccruals When TruAccruals is installed with your TruTime package, the Benefit Time tab is read-only. The Pay Codes displayed in the Benefit Time tab are selected in the Pay Codes Displayed in Employee Master group box in the Policy Maintenance tab of TruAccruals. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-13

141 Validation Tab This Section Describes How to: Create an Employee Validation Table The Validation tab allows you to quickly and easily create a validation table for each employee. You can use the Global Schedule and Save As command to apply the same validation table to multiple employees. Creating an Employee Validation Table Perform the following to create an employee validation table: 1. Select a Location and Terminal from the list of available data collection terminals. 2. In the Pin# field, type in the four digit PIN number used by this employee at the data collection terminal. This feature is only supported by MTX-20 terminal and MobilePunch devices. 3. If you are not using Global Validation, select the Cost Centers, Departments, or Job Classes that the employee has access to. 4. In the Individual Message group box, enter in a custom message to be displayed for the employee at the MTX-20 terminal. Each Line field can contain up to twenty alphanumeric characters. 5. Check Clear Message Lines After Download if you want the Line fields to be cleared after downloading 6. In the At Terminal group box, select one of the following options: Delete After Punch: The message will be deleted after the employee punches IN. Delete After: The message will be displayed up to the specified date (mm/dd/yyyy) when the employee punches IN. Always: The message will be displayed every time the employee punches IN TRUTIME / Employee Setup

142 User Defined Fields Tab This Section Describes How to: Configure User Defined Fields Edit the User Defined Field Properties Enter Data in the User Defined Fields Filter Data Using the User Defined Fields Up to ten custom, user defined fields can be added to the Employee Master in the User Defined Fields tab. These fields can include additional employee information, such as branch locations, emergency phone numbers, and review dates. In addition, these fields can be used as sorting and filtering criteria when selecting a range of employees or generating reports. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-15

143 Configuring the User Defined Fields To configure the User Defined fields, perform the following: 1. In the User Defined Fields tab, select the Edit User Defined Fields command form the Edit menu. A Modify User Defined Field Names dialog box will appear. 2. In the Field drop down list, select the field number you want to configure. 3. Select the style and properties of the field. The choices are: Text: This selection will designate the field as a text box. Enter in a name for the field in the Field Name box. The Edit Mask field allows you to define and format the data that will be entered. To do so, click on the Default Mask button. The Select Default Mask dialog will appear. This dialog box allows you select a predefined format for the field TRUTIME / Employee Setup

144 To select a format, click on an item and click on the OK button. If the default masks contained in the Select Default Mask dialog does not meet your criteria, the following masks (format codes) can be entered directly in the Edit Mask field: 9: Numeric data (0-9) N: Alphanumeric data (0-9 and a-z) X: ASCII characters A: Alphabetic data (a-z) U: Uppercase alphabetic data (A-Z) L: Lowercase alphabetic data (a-z) /: This treats the next character as a literal and not a mask character. For example, a date would be coded as 99//99//99 in the Edit Mask field. Once you have set the Field Name and Edit Mask fields, click on the OK button to create the field. Combo Box: The selection will designate the field as a combination text box/drop down list. This option allows you to create a field with predefined drop down list selections. Enter the name for the field in the Field Name box. The drop down list is created by entering items into the Enter Selection field and adding the item to the list by clicking on the Add button. Once added, the item will appear in the list window to the right of the Enter Selection field. To remove a selection from the drop down list, select the desired item in the list and click on the Remove button. Once the Field Name and drop down list selections have been entered, click on the OK button to create the field. The field will appear as a drop down list in the User Defined Fields tab. 4. You must exit the Employee File Maintenance window for the new User Defined Fields to take effect. Editing the Field Properties Existing User Defined Fields can be modified by selecting the Edit User Defined Fields command in the Edit Menu of the Employee File Maintenance window. The procedure is identical to creating a user defined field. You must exit the Employee File Maintenance window for any modifications to take effect. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-17

145 Data Entry Click on the User Defined Fields tab in the Employee File Maintenance window to view the fields. Data entry is done by selecting the desired field and either entering data in the field or selecting data from a drop down list. User Defined Expression Filter The fields created in the User Defined Fields tab can be used to filter or exclude employees for a range of data using the User Defined Expression Filter window. This window allows you to write custom expressions based on the User Defined Fields that will exclude certain data TRUTIME / Employee Setup

146 This window is accessed by selecting the Advanced button in a Range window. The User Defined Expression Filter window consists of the following: User Defined Fields List: This list contains the names of the User Defined Fields. Values List: This list displays the current values of the User Defined Fields. Expression List: This area is where filtering expressions are composed. A drop down list is provided to view and select previously defined expressions. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-19

147 Operators: The following relational and logical operators are provided to write expressions: Equal to (=): The User Defined Field is equal to this value. Greater Than (>): The User Defined Field is greater than this value. Greater Than or Equal to (>=): The User Defined Field is greater than or equal to this value. Less Than (<): The User Defined Field is less than this value. Less Than or Equal to (<=): The User Defined Field is less than or equal to this value. Not Equal to (<>): The User Defined Field is not equal to this value. AND: A logical operator used to evaluate conditions. When the AND is used with two simple expressions, the condition is true only if both individual expressions are true by themselves. For example: (Expression 1) AND (Expression 2) The above condition is True if both Expression 1 and Expression 2 are True. If one of the expressions are False, then the condition evaluates to False. OR: A logical operator used to evaluate conditions. When the OR is used with two simple expressions, the condition is True if one or both of the individual expressions are True. For example: (Expression 1) OR (Expression 2) The above condition is True if either or both Expression 1 and Expression 2 are True. When using the AND/OR operators, both sides of the operator must be True/False expressions. Parentheses(): A User Defined Field must be enclosed in parenthesis for the expression to be valid. Clicking on the field in the User Defined Field list automatically adds these to the field name in the Expression list. When using compound expressions, parentheses should be used to separate logical groupings of operands and to clearly indicate the intended order of operations. For example: (((A)= 123 ) AND ((B) = 15 )) OR ((A)= 5 ) In the above example, the expression group containing the AND is evaluated first and then the OR is evaluated. ASNUM: This function converts a character string to a real number. ASDATE: This function converts a character string to a date TRUTIME / Employee Setup

148 Creating Expressions: To create expressions, click on the field you want to use in the expression. The field will appear in the Expression list in parentheses. Click on a Function Operator. It will appear after the field in the Expression list. Complete the expression by selecting a value in the Value list. The value will automatically appear in the Expression list contained in single quotation marks. All expressions and relational operators must evaluate to either True or False. Due to this rule, all expressions must take the form of: Value 1 (Relational Operator) Value2 Where Value 1 and Value 2 can be fields or field values and the relational operators can be any valid operator, such as =, <, <=, >, >=, or <>. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-21

149 Wage/Rates Tab This Section Describes How To: Set the Base Rate Set the Job Class Rate Set the Calculation Method Set the Zone Rate Differential and Type (Flat Rate/Percentage) The Wages/Rates tab is used to calculate employee wages for the hours worked. Setting Effective Date Rates To set the Effective Date Rate, click on the Effective Date button. The Effective Date dialog box will appear. It consists of an Effective Date and Rate column. An unlimited number of Effective Dates and Rates can be added. To add a new Effective Date and Rate, click on the Add button in the tool bar. To save changes, click on the Save button. Changes must be saved before existing this dialog box or data entered will be lost TRUTIME / Employee Setup

150 Setting Job Class Rates To set the Job Class Rate, click on the Job Class button. The Job Class Rate dialog box will appear: This dialog box is used to assign an employee s Base Rate when they work in a particular Job Class. The Job Class Rate dialog box consists of a Job Class, an Effective Date and a Rate. An unlimited number of Job Class Rates can be added. The Job Class Rates become effective when the employee works in a given rate on or after the Effective Date. To add a new Effective Date and Rate click on the Add button. To save changes, click on the Save button. Changes must be saved before exiting this dialog box or data entered will be lost. Setting the Calculation Method Employee wages are calculated by the method selected in the Calculation Method chosen. The choices are: No Wage: When selected no wage will be calculated regardless of the setup Highest Rate Tracking: When selected the rate will be determined according to the Highest Rate rule and then take into account the previous job rate when transfers are being used. If the previous job rate is higher that is the rate that will be used. Base Rate Only: When selected the rate will be calculated using the Job Class rate in employee master first, if none is found it will then look to the Effective Date in employee master for a rate, if no rate is entered for either of these settings, nothing will be calculated. Job Rate Only: When selected the rate will be calculated using the rate set in the Job Class module, if nothing is entered for the job no rate will be calculated. Highest Rate: When selected the rate will be calculated using the Job Class rate in employee master first, if none is found it will then look to the Effective Date in employee master for a rate, next it will compare that rate to the rate set in the Job Class module and take the higher of the two to determine the actual calculation rate. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-23

151 Highest Rate: TruTime will apply the highest rate possible based on the Base and Job Class Rates, and the Job Class Rate set in the Job Class window. This base hourly wage rate is determined by automatically searching for a rate in the Job Class Rate dialog box. If that Job Class Rate is found, then the rate is taken from the row with the latest effective date prior to the worked date. The rate found is then compared to the Job Class Rate set in the Job Class window. The higher of these two rates will become the base rate and will be applied. If a Job Class Rate is not found in the Job Class Rate dialog box, TruTime will search the Base Rate dialog box for a rate with the latest effective date prior to the worked date. The rate found is then compared to the Job Class Rate set in the Job Class window. The higher of these two rates will become the Base Rate and will be applied. Setting the Zone Wage Differential To set the employee s wages for each Zone Differential, perform the following: 1. Enter the Wage/Rate amount or percentage in the Zone 1 field. 2. Select the Rate type. The choices are: Flat Rate: This will add the amount entered in the Zone field to the Base Hourly Wage. Percentage: This will increase the Base Hourly Wage by the percentage entered in the Zone field. 3. Repeat for all applicable Zones TRUTIME / Employee Setup

152 Accumulated Tips Tab This Section Describes How To: Reset/Disable the Tip Accumulation Feature Edit Tips The Accumulation Tips Tab is used to track tips entered at the data collection terminals or entered in the Edit Daily Data window. In this tab, you can view the Daily, Pay Period, and Year to Date Tip Totals, as well as set the date that the Pay Period and Year to Date tip totals will reset to zero. Resetting Tip Totals To automatically reset the Year to Date and Pay Period tip totals to zero, click on the Apply Tip Accumulation button, and enter the date (dd/mm/yyyy) in the Auto Reset Date box provided that the totals will be reset. To disable this feature, click on the Apply Tip Accumulation button. This will disable (gray) the date, Daily, Pay Period, and Year to Date fields. TRUTIME / Employee Setup 4-25

153 Editing Tips The Daily and Pay Period tip totals are edited in the Edit Daily Data window. Once an employee is selected you will see the Tip column to the right of the Job Class column in the Punch Data tab grid. When editing tips in the Previous Pay Period, please be aware that the Pay Period Totals have already been posted (added to the Year to Date Totals). If there is a reduction, enter in the amount of the deduction as a Negative (-) number. For example, if the total for Tuesday in the Previous Pay Period displays , and it should have been enter , you would enter for Tuesday TRUTIME / Employee Setup

154 Chapter 5: TruTime Access Using the Access Level and System Access modules located in the File Maintenance tab, you can customize your employees access to TruTime. This can range from full access (all modules and employees) to a limited access of a specific report with a specific employee. This Chapter Includes: Access Level: Enables you to define up to nine levels of rights and access privileges in TruTime. Each TruTime user is assigned an access level. These levels of access are configurable based on your TruTime package and your company s needs. System Access: This module is used to create user profiles and assign levels of access to specific TruTime features and employee information. TRUTIME / TruTime Access 5-1

155 Access Level This Section Describes How To: Create Access Levels The Access Level module enables you to create up to nine levels of rights and accessibility privileges in TruTime. These levels are then assigned to users in the System Access module. The levels of access are configurable based on your TruTime package and your company s needs. Careful consideration should be taken when setting up these levels to assure that users have the correct access profile. Access Levels are created in the Access Level window. This window is a grid with Access Levels numbered one through nine in the column headings and your TruTime package s features and modules listed in rows. For initial installations, the default Access Level is 9. This level has full rights and privileges to all features and modules as indicated by a black check. A black check in a cell indicates that the users assigned to this Access Level have full read/write privileges. A red check indicates read-only access, and a blank cell indicates no access. 5-2 TRUTIME / TruTime Access

156 Creating Access Levels: To create an Access Level, perform the following: 1. Click on the column number representing the Access Level that you wish to configure. The entire column will be highlighted. 2. Rights and privileges to TruTime features and modules can be added or removed globally or individually: Globally: To include all the listed features and modules in the Access Level, select the Active Column command from the Edit menu. A black check will be placed in each row of the column. A black check in a cell indicates that the users assigned to this Access Level have full read/write privileges. To deselect all selections in the column, select the InActive Column command from the Edit menu. The cells in the row will be blank. A blank cell indicates that the users assigned to this Access Level have no access to those features or modules. Individually: To select individual features and modules in the Access Level, select the desired cell in the column. Select the Active (for read/write privileges) or Read Only command from the Edit menu, or the Active (Black check) or Read Only (Red check) buttons from the toolbar. To deselect a selection, click on the InActive command from the Edit menu or the InActive (Eraser) button in the toolbar. The selected cell will be blank. 3. Scroll down to access more TruTime features. After all selections have been made, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. Globally Enabling/Disabling A Function or Module: To globally enable or disable a TruTime feature or module for all Access Levels, select the desired row that lists the feature or module and select the Active or Inactive Row command from the Edit menu. The Active command will place a black check in each cell in the row, and the InActive command will clear each cell. When you have finished, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. Printing: To make a print out of your Access Levels, select the Print command from the File menu or click on the Print button in the toolbar. A print out of the Access Level configurations will be sent to your printer. To change your printer settings, select the Print Setup command from the File menu. This will open the Windows Print Setup dialog box.. TRUTIME / TruTime Access 5-3

157 System Access This Section Describes How To: Create a User Profile Modify a User Profile Delete a User Profile System Access is used to create user profiles and assign access privileges to TruTime features and employee information. This is accomplished through the use of User ID s, Passwords, and Access Levels. Access Levels are specific levels of rights and accessibility privileges to TruTime s features. These levels are custom to your company s needs and are created in the Access Levels module. To launch the System Access module, click on the System Access selection in the File Maintenance tab. The System Access window will appear. The default user is aci, set to Access Level 9, which has full rights and privileges to all features in your TruTime package. 5-4 TRUTIME / TruTime Access

158 Creating a New User Profile: 1. In the System Access window, select the Add command from the Record menu. This will clear all the fields for entry and place the cursor in the User ID field. 2. Enter a unique User ID. This can be up to ten alphanumeric characters, is case sensitive, and cannot contain spaces. Press the Tab key to move to the Password field. 3. Enter a unique Password. This can be up to ten alphanumeric characters, is case sensitive, and cannot contain spaces. Press the Tab key to move to the Access Level field. 4. In the Access Level field, enter a number between 1 and 9. This number corresponds to the levels defined in the Access Level module and determines which modules and features the user can access. 5. The drop down list below the Access Level field is used to limit access to employee information by restricting users access to certain Cost Centers, Departments, Job Classes, and all ten of the User Defined Fields in the Employee Master file. When adding a new User Profile, all possible selections will appear highlighted in the adjacent list box, giving the user access to every employee entered in TruTime. To deselect a highlighted item, hold down the Ctrl key and click once on it. The selections in this box follow And rules. For example, if you select the Department of Support and select the Job Class of TruTime, only employees that are assigned to BOTH the Support Department and the TruTime Job Class can be viewed by the person using this User ID. When User Defined Fields are selected, the values will only show here if they have actually been assigned to an employee. For example, if one of the User Defined Fields is defined as Supervisor, and Bob, Mary, Kate and Jim are entered as supervisors. These names or values will only appear in the list box if a Supervisor has been assigned to an employee. TRUTIME / TruTime Access 5-5

159 6. Select the Pay Rate rights for this user: Yes: The user will have access to the Wage/Rate tab in the Employee Master file and be able to view dollar amounts on reports. No: The user will not have access to the Wage/Rate tab in the Employee Master file and will be unable to view dollar amounts on the reports. 7. Password Expires: Select one of the three available options for controlling the Password: Never Expires: The User ID and Password created will never expire. Expires After: This allows you to set a specific date for the User ID and Password to expire. After this date the user will no longer be able to log on to TruTime. A new User Profile will have to be created for future access. Expires after so many days: A new Password must be entered every so many days for security protection. The User Profile will still exist but when the user tries to log on to TruTime they will be prompted that their Password has expired and they must enter a new password. 8. Once you finish making all your selections click on the Save button in the toolbar or select the Save command from the File menu. Please note that you should keep a record of user profiles for future reference. Modifying a User Profile: You can modify any part of a User Profile except for the User ID. If the User ID must changed, the entire profile must be deleted and recreated. To make modifications: 1. Select the User ID that you want to modify from the drop down list in the toolbar. 2. Make the changes you want to the appropriate fields. 3. Save changes by clicking on the Save button in the toolbar or selecting the Save command from the File menu. Deleting a User Profile: 1. Select the User ID you wish to delete from the drop down list in the toolbar. 2. Select the Delete command from the Record menu. A confirmation message box will appear. Select OK to delete the User Profile. 5-6 TRUTIME / TruTime Access

160 Chapter 6: Working in TruTime The Editing Undefined Data, Edit Daily Data, Global Edit Daily Data, and Recalculate Hours menu items located in the Data Processing tab allow you to view and modify punch data in TruTime. This Chapter Includes: Edit Daily Data: This item is used to adjust an employee s punch times, exception codes, and labor distribution categories, such as Cost Center, Pay Code, and Job Class. Editing Undefined Data: This is used to edit any data that TruTime could not recognize. Global Edit Daily Data: Used to globally adjust all or a selection of employees Punch Times, Hours, Exception Codes, and labor distribution categories. Recalculate Hours: Enables you to recalculate employee hours. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-1

161 Edit Daily Data The Edit Daily Data window is used to adjust an employee s punch times and labor distribution categories. In addition, an employee s schedule may be viewed or edited from this window. To enter the Edit Daily Data window, select the Edit Daily Data menu item from the Data Processing tab. The Select Employee window will appear. Using the Sort boxes, select the desired employee, then click the OK button. The Edit Daily Data window will appear: 6-2 TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

162 Selecting Exception Codes to Display: Up to sixteen exception codes can be displayed in the Edit Daily Data window. The exception codes that can be displayed are listed and defined below: To activate these exception codes, select the Exceptions command from the Options menu, place a check next to the desired exception codes, and click on the OK button. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-3

163 Schedule Display: To view a selected employee s schedule, select the Schedule Display command from the Option menu. The Schedule dialog box will appear displaying the selected employee s schedule. This dialog box allows you to add or modify the Individual Schedule by entering in the desired information and clicking on the OK button. Employee Master: To view a selected employee s information, select the Employee Master command from the Option menu. The Employee Master dialog box will appear displaying the selected employee s information. Calculate Hours: To calculate an employee s hours after making edits, select the Calculate Hours command from the Option menu. 6-4 TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

164 Punch Data Tab This Section Describes How To: Add Punches Delete Punches Modify a Punch Modify the Exception Code Modify the Cost Center Modify the Department Modify the Job Class Modify Daily TIP Apply PAP (Paid As Punch) Apply Hours Authorization Check The Punch Data tab allows you to edit employees punched data. Adding Punches: You can add a row or a single punch. Punches are added by creating a Punch Row and entering in time (in 24 hour format). To do so, select the date that you want to add punches to, and click on the Punch Row button. Deleting Punches: To delete a punch, select the date that you want to delete punches from, and select the Delete Data command from the Edit menu. A confirmation dialog will appear. Click on the OK button. This can also be accomplish by using the Ctrl-X command. Modifying a Punch: To enter or modify punch times, select the IN or OUT punch data field to be modified, and enter in the appropriate time in 24 hour format. To save changes, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. Modifying the Exception Code: TruTime will automatically modify the exception code when changes have been made to the Punch, Pay Class, or Schedule Data. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-5

165 Modifying the Cost Center: Select the Cost Center field to be modified, then select another Cost Center from the list in the text box on the toolbar. To save changes, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. Modifying the Department: Select the Department field to be modified, then select another Department from the list in the text box on the toolbar. To save changes, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. Modifying the Job Class: Select the Job Class field to be modified, then select another Job Class from the list in the text box on the toolbar. To save changes, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. Modifying Daily TIP: This feature is used to make modifications to the Daily TIPs entered at the MTX-20 terminals. To do so, select the TIP field to be modified, then enter the amount in the text box on the toolbar. To save changes, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. PAP Paid As Punch: This feature is used to override fixed schedule rounding with the rounding set in the Open Schedule rounding section of the Pay Class module. PAP can be applied to an IN or OUT punch by placing the cursor in the PAP field located to the left of each punch, and selecting the PAP button located on the toolbar. PAP can be removed by placing the cursor in the same field and selecting the PAP button. To apply the new rounding select the Recalculate button located on the toolbar. Hours Authorization: When the Hours Authorization feature, located the System Configuration module, is set to Yes, TruTime will not include an employee s hours in the payroll export file until a check mark is placed the Auth column to the left of the Hours. The Hours Authorization Check button is located to the right of the PAP button on the toolbar. 6-6 TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

166 Accumulated Hours Tab To view the employee s accumulated hours for the pay period, select the Accumulated Hours tab. The information in this tab is read-only and cannot be modified. Hours Adjustment Tab The Hours Adjustment tab allows you to add hours or dollars to an employee s accumulated totals. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-7

167 Type: This column allows you to select hours or dollars. Mode: This column assigns the adjusted hours to the first or second Daily Schedule. Modifications are made by selecting the desired Mode field from the list in the text box on the toolbar. Press the Enter key. Pay Code: This column selects the type of Pay Code to be assigned to the adjusted hours. To change the Pay Code, select the desired Pay Code field from the list in the text box on the toolbar. Press the Enter key. If you are adding Dollars only, the Pay Codes set to Dollars will be displayed. Zone Code: This column applies a Zone Code to the adjusted hours. To change the Zone Code, select the desired Zone Code field from the list in the text box on the toolbar. Press the Enter key. Hours: This column allows you to enter the number of hours to be adjusted. Select the desired Hours field and type in the number of hours to be added or subtracted for the day. When subtracting hours a - must be entered in front of the number for example, -0:30 would deduct 30 minutes on the assigned day. Press the Enter key to continue. When assigning Benefit Time, TruTime will compare the balance of Benefit Hours remaining for the Pay Code defined. If there are not enough hours, TruTime will not allow you to save the adjustment. Dollars: This column allows you to enter the amount of dollars to be adjusted. 6-8 TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

168 Edit Undefined Data This Section Describes How To: Identify Undefined Data Edit Undefined Data Edit Undefined Schedule Data Delete Undefined Data The Edit Undefined Data window is used to edit any data that TruTime could not recognize. It is accessed by selecting the Edit Undefined Data menu item in the Data Processing tab. Identifying Undefined Data Data fields which are undefined will be listed in the Edit Undefined Data window with a description of each item. A maximum of 101 undefined records can be displayed at a time. Please be aware that there may be multiple pages of undefined data. The following is a list of possible undefined data errors: Employee Master The employee number or badge ID was not found. TruTime could not find an employee that has a matching Badge Number or a Badge Number has been given to an existing employee but not updated in the Employee Master file. You must either add an employee with the correct Badge Number, change the Badge Number of an existing employee, or change the Badge Number received from the terminal. Schedule Pay Class, Schedule or Zone Differential number not found. An employee must be assigned to either an Individual Open/Fixed, or Automatic Schedule. Once a schedule has been assigned to an employee, you may edit the undefined data and process the punches. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-9

169 Pay Code Pay Code not found in Pay Code table. TruTime could not find a Pay Code that was assigned at the terminal or in the Edit Daily Data window. You must add a Pay Code, delete, or change the undefined Pay Code data. Cost Center, Department, and Job Class Cost Center not found, Department not found, or Job Class not found. TruTime could not find a valid entry for one of these labor distribution fields. You must add a new Cost Center, Department, or Job Class, delete or change the undefined Cost Center, Department, or Job Class data. If none of the above restores the data, contact your TruTime support representative for further assistance. Editing Undefined Data TruTime allows you to edit undefined data from the Employee Master file, Schedules, Pay Codes, Cost Centers, Departments, or Job Class. The type of data which is undefined will be listed in the Description field. To correct data, select the desired field in the list, and then select the appropriate or replacement data from the list in the text box on the toolbar. To save changes, select the Save command from the File menu or click on the Save button in the toolbar. Upon exiting the Edit Undefined Data window, TruTime will recalculate the hours for the corrected data. Editing Undefined Schedule Data Click on the Restore Undefined Schedule button. A Restore Undefined Schedule Data message will appear. Select Yes to restore or No not to restore the data. Deleting Undefined Data This feature allows you to delete any undefined data records. To do so, select the Function Code field, and click on the Delete button. A Delete Selected Row warning will appear. Click on OK to delete, or Cancel to cancel. Up to 101 records can be selected at one time. To delete more than 101 records, this process must be repeated until all the desired records have been deleted TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

170 Global Edit Daily Data This Section Describes How To: Set the Criteria for Global Editing Globally Edit Hours with No Exceptions Globally Edit Punches with No Exceptions Globally Edit Punches with Exceptions Globally Edit Hours with Exceptions The Global Editing window is used to globally adjust hours for all or a selected range of employees Punch Times, Hours, Exception Codes, and labor distribution categories. This module is accessed by selecting the Global Edit Daily Data menu item in the Data Processing tab. Criteria for Global Editing Globally editing data is performed by first selecting a range of data (date, employees, Exceptions, Group, and Pay Codes), and then editing hours and punches with or without exceptions. To set the data range, perform the following: 1. In the Starting on field, select the start date of the data you wish to edit. 2. An end date of the data may be selected in one of two ways; you can check the Until selection and select an end date in the field provided, or select either Forward or Backward. If Forward or Backward is chosen, you must set the interval (integer) and the period (Days, Weeks, or Months) from the start date that you want to edit the data. 3. From the Group, Exception Code, and Pay Code lists, choose the desired criteria. The choices for each list is All, Select, or None. If the All or Select is chosen TruTime will sort through all employees, selecting only those which meet the criteria set. If Select is chosen, you must make selections in each list. None should be chosen if you want all employees to be globally edited regardless of Group, Exception Code, and Pay Code. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-11

171 4. Click on the Range button in the toolbar to select a range of employees. The Range window will appear. 5. Click on the Employee button in the Range window. A list of all employees will appear. If you select a specific range of Departments, Cost Centers, Job Classes, or Pay Classes, only employees assigned will appear in the employee list. To select individual or groups of employees, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the desired employees. To select all the employees, click on the All button. 6. Once you have the selected employees displayed in the Range dialog box, click on the OK button. This will return you to the Global Editing window. 7. To set the sorting sequence of employees, click on the Sorting Sequence button in the toolbar, or select the Sorting Sequence command from the Options menu. The Sorting Sequence dialog box will appear. 8. Select the sorting criteria from each of the Key Item drop down lists, and click on the OK button TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

172 Globally Editing Hours with No Exceptions 1. Select the global editing criteria in the Global Editing window. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Global button. A Warning dialog box will appear displaying how your editing criteria will be applied. 2. After the selected employees have been prepared, a Global Edit Daily Data window will appear. 3. Click on the Global Hours Adjustment tab. The Global Hours Adjustment tab consists of a chart that lists each day of the Current Pay Period, Mode, Pay Code, Zone Code, Hours, and Reason For Global Editing in columns. 4. Select the fields to be edited. When you select a field in the grid, the text box in the toolbar will be activated. If the data requires a selection list, a drop down list will appear in the text box. Type in the new information or select it from the text box in the toolbar. 5. When all edits have been made, click on the Globe button in the toolbar. 6. A Warning dialog box will appear listing all employees that will be affected by the Global Edit. Select OK to proceed or Cancel to cancel the operation. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-13

173 Globally Editing Punches with No Exceptions 1. Select the global editing criteria in the Global Editing window. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Global button. A Warning dialog box will appear displaying how your editing criteria will be applied. 2. After the selected employees have been prepared, a Global Edit Daily Data window will appear. 3. Click on the Global Punch Adjustment tab. The Global Punch Adjustment tab consists of a grid that lists each day of the Current Pay Period, IN and OUT Punches, Cost Center, Department, Job Class, Reason For Adjustment, and Tip(s) in columns. 4. Select the fields that you wish to edit. When you select a field in the table, the text box in the toolbar will be activated. If the data requires a selection list, a drop down list will appear in the text box. Type in the new information or select it from the text box in the toolbar. 5. When all edits have been made, click on the Globe button in the toolbar. 6. A Warning dialog box will appear listing all employees that will be affected by the Global Edit. Select OK to proceed or Cancel to cancel the operation TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

174 Globally Editing Punches with Exceptions 1. Select the global editing criteria in the Global Editing window. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Exceptions button. A Warning dialog box will appear displaying how your editing criteria will be applied. 2. After the selected employees have been prepared, a Global Edit Daily Data window will appear. 3. Click on the Global Punch Adjustment tab. The Global Punch Adjustment tab consists of a grid that lists each day of the Current Pay Period, IN and OUT Punches, Cost Center, Department, Job Class, Reason For Adjustment, and Tip(s) in columns. 4. Select the fields that you wish to edit. When you select a field in the table, the text box in the toolbar will be activated. If the data requires a selection list, a drop down list will appear in the text box. Type in the new information or select it from the text box in the toolbar. 5. When all edits have been made, click on the Globe button in the toolbar. 6. A Warning dialog box will appear listing all employees that will be affected by the Global Edit. Select OK to proceed or Cancel to cancel the operation. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-15

175 Globally Editing Hours with Exceptions 1. Select the global editing criteria in the Global Editing window. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Exceptions button. A Warning dialog box will appear displaying how your editing criteria will be applied. 2. After the selected employees have been prepared, a Global Edit Daily Data window will appear. 3. Click on the Global Hours Adjustment tab. The Global Hours Adjustment tab consists of a grid that lists each day of the Current Pay Period, Mode, Pay Code, Zone Code, Hours, and Reason For Global Editing in columns. 4. Select the fields that you wish to edit. When you select a field in the table, the text box in the toolbar will be activated. If the data requires a selection list, a drop down list will appear in the text box. Type in the new information or select it from the text box in the toolbar. 5. When all edits have been made, click on the Globe button in the toolbar. 6. A Warning dialog box will appear listing all employees that will be affected by the Global Edit. Select OK to proceed or Cancel to cancel the operation TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

176 Recalculate Hours This Section Describes How To: Select a Range of Employees Select the Range (Pay Period) Select the Pay Class Recalculate Employee Hours The Recalculate Hours window allows you to recalculate employee hours based on their Pay Class, Schedule, and daily punches. This option is useful if you make a change in TruTime which effects more than one employee. To recalculate employee hours, you must select an employee or range of employees, the Pay Period, and Pay Class. Selecting a Range of Employees 1. Click on the Range button on the toolbar. The Range window will appear. TRUTIME / Working in TruTime 6-17

177 2. Click on the Employee button in the Range window. A list of all employees will appear. If you select a specific range of Departments, Cost Centers, Job Classes, or Pay Classes, only employees assigned to the selected categories will appear in the employee list. To select individual or groups of employees, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the desired employees. To select all the employees, click on the All button. 3. For a more advanced employee filter, click on the Advanced button. The User Defined Expression window will appear. This window will allow you to select employees based on the ten User Defined fields of the Employee Master file, and logical expressions. Refer to the User Defined Fields section of Chapter 4 for detailed instructions on using this option. 4. Once you have the selected employees displayed in the Range dialog box, click on the OK button. This will return you to the Recalculate Hours window. Range (Pay Period) Select the Pay Period from the drop down list that you want to recalculate for. The choices are: Current Pay Period, Previous Pay Period, Today, Yesterday, Current Week, Last Week, and Date Range. If you select Date Range, you must enter the Start and End Dates of the range, or select Until and enter in an End Date. Pay Class Code You must select a Pay Class Code from the Pay Class Code drop down list to recalculate employee hours. Recalculating the Employee Hours Once the employees, Pay Period, and Pay Class have been selected, click on the Recalculate button in the toolbar. You must exit before the recalculation will begin TRUTIME / Working in TruTime

178 Chapter 7: TruTime Reports The Reports tab is used to create a series of labor management reports. These reports can be utilized to increase the efficiency of your operations and control your labor costs. There are two report formats available; the Time Distribution Report and the standard TruTime report. The Time Distribution Report allows you to to create custom profiles that can be reused and modified. Standard TruTime reports utilize standard sorting, date range, and fixed report selections. These include the Time Card Report, Attendance Report, Exception Report, etc. You can output these reports to a file, screen, or printer. This Chapter Includes: Time Distribution Report: This report allows you to generate reports by creating and using a report Profile. The Profile that consists of a date range, Cost Centers, employees, and etc., from the report setup. Reports can be output to a printer, screen, or other applications such as Word, Excel, or . Standard TruTime Reports: These reports utilize a fixed format and standard Report dialog box based on the report selection. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-1

179 Time Distribution Report This Section Describes How To: Create A Profile Modify A Profile Run an Existing Profile Exit the Time Distribution Report The Time Distribution Report allows you to generate reports by creating and using a report Profile or template, with the same functionality as the standard TruTime Exception Report. Output of the reports generated can be sent to your system s printer, or other applications such as Word, Excel, or an editor (including selection of the recipient). Creating A Profile 1. Select the Time Distribution Report menu item in the Reports tab. A Profiles Explorer dialog box will appear. If there are existing Profiles, they will appear in the list box. 2. There are two ways to create a report; select the New command from the Profiles explorer, or select the New command from the Profile menu in the Time Distribution window. The Report Properties window will appear: 7-2 TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

180 3. Select a Date Range from the drop down list. The choices are Current Pay Period, Previous Pay Period, Today, Yesterday, Current Week, Last Week, or Custom Date Range. For custom Date Range, you must select the Start and Until dates, and Forward or Backward if applicable. Click the Next>> button. 4. If Current or Previous Pay Period was selected as the Date Range, you must select a Pay Class from the drop down list, then click on the Next>> button. 5. Select the desired Cost Centers from the Available Cost Centers list using the arrow buttons. For Cost Centers to be included in the report they must appear in the Selected Cost Centers list. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-3

181 Select the desired Cost Centers from the Available Cost Centers list using the arrow buttons. The operation of the buttons are as follows: (Select): Highlighted items in the Available Cost Centers list will be moved to the Selected Cost Centers list. (Select All): All items in the Available Cost Centers list will be moved to the Selected Cost Centers list. (Deselect): Highlighted items in the Selected Cost Centers list will be moved to the Available Cost Centers list. (Deselect All): All items in the Selected Cost Centers list will be moved to the Available Cost Centers list. For Cost Centers to be included in the report they must appear in the Selected Cost Centers list. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Next>> button. 6. Select the desired Departments from the Available Departments list using the arrow buttons. For Departments to be included in the report they must appear in the Selected Departments list. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Next>> button. 7-4 TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

182 7. Select the desired Job Classes from the Available Job Classes list using the arrow buttons. For Job Classes to be included in the report they must appear in the Selected Job Classes list. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Next>> button. 8. Select desired Pay Classes from the Available Pay Classes list using the arrow buttons. Pay Classes included in the report must appear in the Selected Pay Classes list. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Next>> button. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-5

183 9. Select the desired employees from the Available Employees list using the arrow buttons. For Employees to be included in the report they must appear in the Selected Employees list. You have the choice of including Inactive and Active employees in the report. Place a check in the appropriate selection. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Next>> button. 10. Type in the desired Report Title. 7-6 TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

184 11. In the Report Sections group box, select the desired information you want to include in the report; Punch Information, Labor Distribution, Supervisor Changes, Adjustment Reasons, and Signature Line. The Punch Information and Labor Distribution selections enable you to include employees and labor distribution information in the report by selecting the appropriate button. After you select the Short or Detail Information button, you can move the desired information from the Available to the Selected fields as desired. If you check Punch Information, and click the Punches and Exceptions Information button, the bottom of the window will change as shown: TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-7

185 With this information, the exception codes can be chosen for the report. The Include Exceptions Information checkbox will display the selected exceptions on the report. The Print Employees with Selected Exceptions checkbox only will include employees on the report that have any of the selected exceptions. If you check Labor Distribution and click the Labor Distribution Information button, the bottom of the window will change as shown. Select the items from the Available fields list that you would like to include in the report. A labor distribution report is as follows: 12. In the Total Format group box, select Dollars, Hours, or Both (Hours and Dollars). 13. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Next>> button. 7-8 TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

186 14. Using the left and right arrow buttons, select the fields (up to three) from the Available Fields list that you want to sort the report on. Once selected, you can set the sorting order by highlighting desired items in the Selected Fields list using the up and down arrows. In addition, you can also select whether you want ascending or descending order, page breaks, totals, or headers from the dialogue box below the Selected Fields list. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Next>> button. 15. Select the Output Format of the report in the Data Destination group box. The choices are; Printer, Disk File, Application, MAPI Mail, VIN Mail, or Exchange Mail. When you have finished making your selections, click on the Next button. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-9

187 16. Select the desired action that you would like to perform at this point and click OK. The choices are: Save This Report Template and Run It Now, Just Save This Report Template, or Just Run This Report Template. If you wish to make modifications to the report, click on the Back button. 17. If you selected Save This Report Template and Run It Now or Just Save This Report Template, you will be prompted to save the report. Once saved, a report will be generated on screen. If you selected Just Run This Report Template you will be prompted to run the report. Click on Yes and the report will be generated TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

188 Modifying A Profile Perform the following to modify an existing Profile: 1. Select the Time Distribution Report menu item in the Reports tab. A Profiles Explorer dialog box will appear. If there are existing Profiles, they will appear in the list box. 2. Select a Profile from the list. Click on the Properties button or click on OK, or select the Open command from the Profile menu. The Report Properties window will appear. 3. Change the report parameters as necessary. Running an Existing Profile Existing Profiles can be run by; selecting an existing Profile from the Profiles explorer, or selecting the Open command from the Profile menu in the Time Distribution window and selecting the Profile Icon. Exiting To exit the Time Distribution Report window, select the Exit command from the Profile menu. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the Yes button to exit. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-11

189 Standard TruTime Reports This Section Describes How To: Select A Range of Employees Select the Pay Period Range for the Report Select the Pay Class Set the Sorting Sequence Set the Dollar Totals Output Reports to a Screen, Printer, or File Standard TruTime reports differ from the Time Distribution Report in that they utilize a standard Report dialog box based on the report selection instead of a Profile, and fixed formats. When a report is selected (other than the Time Distribution Report) in the Reports tab, the dialog box for that report will appear. These dialog boxes enable you to select the employee and date ranges, Pay Class, sorting sequence, Exceptions, and the output device for each report. Selecting a Range of Employees: 1. Click on the Range button in the toolbar, or select the Range command from the Options menu. The Range window will appear TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

190 2. Click on the Employee button in the Range window. A list of all employees will appear. If you select a specific range of Departments, Cost Centers, Job Classes, or Pay Classes, only employees assigned to those items will appear in the employee list. To select individual or groups of employees, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting the desired employees. To select all the employees, click on the All button. 3. For a more advanced employee filter, click on the Advanced button. (This feature is not applicable for the Manpower, Cost Center Analysis, Department Analysis, Job Class Analysis, Audit Trail, and Labor Analysis reports.) The User Defined Expression Filter window will appear. This window allows you to write custom expressions based on the User Defined Fields of the Employee Master for filtering or excluding employees from the report. The User Defined Expression Filter window consists of the following: User Defined Fields List: This list contains the names of the User Defined Fields. Values List: This list displays the current values of the User Defined Fields. Expression List: This area is where filtering expressions are composed. A drop down list is provided to view and select previously defined expressions. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-13

191 Operators: The following relational and logical operators are provided to write expressions: Equal to (=): The User Defined Field is equal to this value. Greater Than (>): The User Defined Field is greater than this value. Greater Than or Equal to (>=): The User Defined Field is greater than or equal to this value. Less Than (<): The User Defined Field is less than this value. Less Than or Equal to (<=): The User Defined Field is less than or equal to this value. Not Equal to (<>): The User Defined Field is not equal to this value. AND: A logical operator used to evaluate conditions. When the AND is used with two simple expressions, the condition is true only if both individual expressions are true by themselves. For example: (Expression 1) AND (Expression 2) The above condition is True if both Expression 1 and Expression 2 are True. If one of the expressions are False, then the condition evaluates to False. OR: A logical operator used to evaluate conditions. When the OR is used with two simple expressions, the condition is True if one or both of the individual expressions are True. For example: (Expression 1) OR (Expression 2) The above condition is True if either or both Expression 1 and Expression 2 are True. When using the AND/OR operators, both sides of the operator must be True/False expressions. Parentheses(): A User Defined Field must be enclosed in parenthesis for the expression to be valid. Clicking on the field in the User Defined Field list automatically adds these to the field name in the Expression list. When using compound expressions, parentheses should be used to separate logical groupings of operands and to clearly indicate the intended order of operations. For example: (((A)= 123 ) AND ((B) = 15 )) OR ((A)= 5 ) In the above example, the expression group containing the AND is evaluated first and then the OR is evaluated. ASNUM: This function converts a character string to a real number. ASDATE: This function converts a character string to a date TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

192 To create expressions, click on the field you want to use in the expression. The field will appear in the Expression list in parentheses. Click on a Function Operator. It will appear after the field in the Expression list. Complete the expression by selecting a value in the Value list. The value will automatically appear in the Expression list contained in single quotation marks. All expressions and relational operators must evaluate to either True or False. Due to this rule, all expressions must take the form of: Value 1 (Relational Operator) Value2 Where Value 1 and Value 2 can be fields or field values and the relational operators can be any valid operator, such as =, <, <=, >, >=, or <>. 4. Once you have the selected employees displayed in the Range dialog box, click on the OK button. This will return you to the report dialog box. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-15

193 Range (Pay Period): Select the Pay Period from the drop down list that you want to create the report for. The choices are: Current Pay Period, Previous Pay Period, Today, Yesterday, Current Week, Last Week, and Date Range. If you select Date Range, you must enter the Start and End Dates of the range, or select Until and enter in an End Date. Pay Class: You must select a Pay Class from the Pay Class drop down list to generate a report. Sorting Sequence: To set the sorting sequence of the report, perform the following: 1. Click on the Sorting Sequence button in the toolbar, or select the Sorting Sequence command from the Options menu. The Sorting Sequence dialog box will appear. 2. Select the sorting criteria from each of the Key Item drop down lists. 3. Select the Page Break option if you want a page break after any of the Key Items in your report. 4. Click on the OK button. Dollar Totals: The Time Card, Schedule Vs. Actual, Accumulation, Labor, Cost Center, Department, Zone, and Job Class Analysis reports gives you the option of displaying totals in hours, dollars, or both. To select the report totals click on the $ button in the toolbar or select the Dollars command from the Options menu. The Dollars dialog box will appear. Make a selection and click on the OK button. Screen: To output a report to your computer s screen, click on the Screen button in the toolbar or select the Screen command from the File menu. To output the onscreen report to your system s printer, click on the Printer button in the report window TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

194 Printer: To output a report to your system s printer, click on the Printer button in the toolbar or select the Printer command from the File menu. To view or configure your printer s settings, select the Printer Setup command, also in the File menu. File: To output a report to a file, click on the File button in the toolbar or select the File command from the File menu. You will be prompted to enter in a filename and directory for this report. Exit: To exit a Report dialog box, select the Exit command from the File menu. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-17

195 Time Card Report The Time Card Report contains all daily punch activity for each employee specified including: In and Out punches, Exceptions, Cost Centers, Departments, Job Classes, Pay Codes, Zone Codes, and total hours worked for the day and Pay Period. In addition to the display totals option, the Time Card Report also allows you the option of including Exceptions in the report. To do so, select the Exceptions command from the Options menu. A dialog box will appear listing the Exceptions. Place a check for each item that you want to include in the report and click on the OK button TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

196 Attendance Report The Attendance Report lists all employees who have punched in on the day specified. This report includes the Date, Day, and In and Out punches. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-19

197 Exception Report This report lists all employees who have deviated from their schedules. The Exception Report dialog box differs slightly from the standard report dialog box in that it requires you to choose (Select or All) the Exception Codes that will be used in the report. When generated, the report appears as follows: 7-20 TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

198 Tardy Report The Tardy Report shows all employees that have punched in after their scheduled start time. The Tardy/Early Leave Exception Reporting field in the Pay Class module defines the point at which the employee will show up on this report. The Employee Tardy Report looks at the settings in the Tardy/Early Leave Unit and Point fields of the Time Rounding Exception Reporting group box in the Pay Class window to define when employees will be included in this report. Absence Report This report lists employees who were scheduled to work, but did not punch in for the day. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-21

199 Manpower Report This report is divided into thirty minute intervals for the selected day of the selected Job Class. It lists the total number of employees scheduled to work and scheduled for standby for each thirty minute interval during the day. Schedule Vs. Actual Report The Schedule Vs. Actual Report will compare the actual hours worked to the scheduled hours for each employee specified. The report will detail the amount of hours the employee deviated from the schedule and the percentage of deviation for each selected day TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

200 Cost Center Analysis Report The Cost Center Analysis Report will list all hours attributed to the selected Cost Center. It includes the Pay Code, the employees who worked the hours, transfer hours, and the total number of hours. Department Analysis Report The Department Analysis Report contains all hours attributed to the selected Department. It includes the Pay Code, the employees who worked the hours, transfer hours, and the total number of hours. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-23

201 Job Class Analysis Report The Job Class Analysis report will show all hours attributed to the selected Job Class. It includes the Pay Code used, the employees who worked the hours and the total number of hours, and a breakdown of transfer hours. Zone Analysis Report This report separates hours worked into each Zone defined for the specified day. This includes the Pay Code used, the employees who worked the hours and the total number of hours TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

202 Threshold Report The Threshold Report includes all employees who have worked more, less, or equal to the specified number of hours. This report can be used as an approaching or exceeding overtime report. The Exception Report requires you to set the criteria that will be used to generate the report. To setup the report, click on the Comparison Status command in the Options menu. Each condition uses the AND operator, which means that each condition must be met to appear on the report. The first column specifies the Pay Code to do the comparison on. The All selection means all Pay Codes added together. The Day operator and Value is compared to each day s hours. The Date Range operator and Value is compared to all the hours within the date range specified to run the report. When generated, the report appears as follows: TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-25

203 Accumulation Report The Accumulation Report lists total hours for each employee by Pay Code and Zone for the selected Pay Period TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

204 Audit Trail Report The Audit Trail Report details all edits performed in Edit and Global Edit Daily Data. This list includes the Date, Time, and User ID and name of the person who performed the edits, the record that was changed and details of the edit. This feature must be enabled in System Configuration to generate a report. When exiting the report, you will be prompted to purge (remove) Audit Trail data for the date range of the report. Click on Yes to purge the Audit Trail data, or No to exit. Once purged, the data can not be retrieved. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-27

205 Historical Exception Report The Historical Exception Report provides a quick reference which details exceptions in an employee s schedule. Like the Exception Report, this report requires you to choose (Select, All, or None) the Exception Codes that will be used in the report. You can also select the Pay Codes (Select, All, or None) that the Exceptions occur in. When you run the report, you will be prompted to select the type of report that will be generated. The choices are Historical Exception, Historical Hours, and Historical Summary Report. Make a selection and click on the OK button TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

206 The Historical Exception Report has the following format: The Historical Hours Report has the following format: TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-29

207 The Historical Summary Report has the following format: Labor Analysis Report The Labor Analysis Report details the number of hours accrued in each Pay Code by the selected employee. This report is organized by Cost Center, Department, Job Class, and employee. Labor transfers are not included in this report TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

208 Tips Report This report provides a list of tip totals organized by date, day of week, Employee Number and Name. Access Control Report The Access Control Report lists the Access Control transactions in your database. TRUTIME / TruTime Reports 7-31

209 Schedule Posting Report This report enables you to print an employee schedule from TruScheduler and Individual Schedule only. On-Premises Report This report provides a list of employees that are on or off the premises TRUTIME / TruTime Reports

210 Chapter 8: TruTime Communications This chapter explains how to connect, control and administer your Amano and Non-Amano data collection terminals. Supported terminals include Amano s MTX, ABX-10, AMX-10, TC-500, MJR-8150, RSI HandPunch, Kronos 45/55 and System 400, and CMI 1600 Series terminals. This Chapter Includes: MTX Polling/Downloading: Enables you to configure MTX terminals for use with TruTime and to administrate them through TruTime. Clock Maintenance: Enables you to set up ABX-10, AMX-10, TC-500, and MJR-8150 data collection terminals to allow for communications, and assign them to groups. Polling: Defines the polling parameters for the ABX-10, AMX-10, TC-500 and MJR-8150 data collection terminals. Download: Enables you to send the download parameters to the ABX-10, AMX-10, TC-500, and MJR-8150 terminals. Non-ACI Terminals Polling/Downloading: Enables you to configure the RSI HandPunch, Kronos 45/55 and System 400, and CMI 1600 Series terminals for use with TruTime. Auto Processing: This utility is used to automatically poll MTX and Non-ACI data collection terminals, generate reports, and to perform database backups at prescheduled times of the day and days of the week. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-1

211 MTX Polling/Download MTX Polling/Download is used to configure MTX terminals for use with TruTime and to administrate them through TruTime. This includes creating relay schedules, setting up programming and terminal parameters, and manually polling and downloading. Selecting MTX Manual Polling/Download Schedule from the Communications menu will open the Polling/Download window. The Polling/Download window consists of six tabs (Polling tab being the default view) with each having a specific function. Polling: This is used to define polling (uploading) options and manually polling active MTX terminals. Download: This is the user interface for setting download options and manually downloading information such as relay schedules or employee validation tables to a single MTX terminal, a group of MTX terminals, or all the MTX terminals that are active and connected to TruTime. Terminal Setup: Enables you to assign a unique name and address to each terminal within a Location, as well as set the time and date for terminal synchronization. Terminal Programming: This tab is used to select and download the terminal application files that are used by the terminal s operating system (TOS) to define the functionality of the terminal, such as the terminal display and installed hardware. In addition, it can be used to poll or query a terminal to determine the application file resident in the TOS, or set an MTX terminal to emulate older Amano TC-500 or AM Series terminals. Location Setup: Enables you to define the site or area where MTX terminals are located. Relay Setup: This tab is used to create schedules for controlling the relay circuits of the optional Signal Kit(s) installed in the MTX terminals. 8-2 TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

212 Location Setup Tab This Section Describes How to: Create a Location Modify a Location Delete a Location The Location Setup tab is used to define the site or area where MTX terminals are located. A Location or location record can be used to reference a single terminal or group of terminals. Up to 31 MTX terminals can be connected to the Host PC in daisy chain fashion. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-3

213 Creating A Location: To create or add a Location, click on the New button and enter the following information: Location Name: This unique name describes the area or site where the MTX terminals are located. Time Zone Offset: This is used to calculate the time difference between the Host PC and the Location (terminals) if they are located in different time zones. The default value is 0:00, and an offset can be set by using the drop down list provided. The Time Zone Offset selected will be used in the calculation of the Remote Time (terminal time) that appears in the Set Time dialog box of the Terminals Setup tab. Communications Port: This area defines the Com Port that connects the terminals in the Location. Com Port: Using the drop down list, select the port that will communicate with the terminals. Baud Rate: Using the drop down list, select the baud rate that is applicable to the Location and terminals. Direct/Modem/Ethernet: Select the type of connection you are using to communicate with the terminals. Direct: Select this if the terminals in the Location are connected directly to the Com Port of the Host PC. Modem: Select this if a modem is used at the Com Port of the Host PC to communicate to the terminals in the Location. When selected, the Modem Setup button and Phone Number field are enabled. Enter in the modem phone number and click on the Modem Setup button. This button will open the Communications Port Setup dialog box, which is used to select the modem. Modem Name: Select the modem from the drop down list provided. If your modem is not available from the list, select a compatible model. This information should be provided in the modem s documentation. 8-4 TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

214 Initial String: Once a modem has been selected, the recommended initial string will be shown in this edit box. From this location the initial string can be modified. Clicking on the OK button will save any modifications to the initial string. Ethernet: Select this option if you are using an Ethernet Option Board to communicate with the Host PC, and enter the IP Address of the terminal. Saving the Location: Once all the Location information has been entered, click on the Save button. Modifying A Location: To modify a Location, select the Location from the drop down list and edit the desired fields. To save changes, click on the Save button. If the Location Name is changed, a new Location will be created. Deleting A Location: To delete a Location, select the desired Location from the drop down list and click on the Delete button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. To delete the Location, click on the Yes button. To cancel, click on the No button. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-5

215 Terminal Setup Tab This Section Describes How to: Automatically and Manually Add a Terminal Record Save a Terminal Record Modify a Terminal Record Delete a Terminal Record Set the Clock Display and Enable Daylight Saving Time on a Terminal Clear Transaction and Validation Data From a Terminal The Terminal Setup tab enables you to add or remove terminals in a Location. Each terminal is defined by its Location, name, terminal number (address), and serial number. Operations include auto detection or updating, manual updating, clearing terminal data, modifying and deleting terminal records, and remotely setting the clock display and configuration parameters for each terminal. 8-6 TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

216 Adding Terminals: Terminals can be added automatically through the use of the Auto Update button or clicking on the New button. Terminals can be added manually by entering the required terminal information in the fields provided. Auto Update: To add terminals automatically, select a Location and click on the Auto Update button. TruTime will attempt to detect and establish communications with the terminals in the selected Location. When it has finished, TruTime will momentarily display the following message. If TruTime successfully communicated with the terminals, the terminals will appear in the Terminal List. Manual Terminal Entry: To manually add a terminal to a Location, select a Location and click on the New button. This action will clear the fields in the Manual Entry group box. Enter in the following: Serial No. The serial number of the terminal. Terminal No.: Each terminal assigned to a Location must have a unique address within that Location. The address of the terminal should be the same as the address assigned to the terminal during installation. Valid values are 1 through 31. Each location may have up to 31 MTX terminals connected together in daisy chain fashion. Refer to the MTX terminal s documentation for assigning addresses and network connections. Terminal Name: Each terminal must be given a unique name within a given Location. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-7

217 Saving a Terminal Record After you have entered the terminal information in the fields of the Manual Entry group box, click on the Save button. The information entered will be added to the Terminal List, with the word Add in the Active column. This means the terminal configuration has not yet been downloaded to the MTX terminal. The configuration must be downloaded to the terminal for it to be recognized by TruTime. This information can be downloaded by clicking on the Manual Update button. When the download is complete, the following message will be momentarily displayed: The word Yes will now appear in the Active column of the Terminal List indicating that the terminal has been recognized, and the configuration parameters have been successfully downloaded. Terminal List: This list contains the serial number, address and name of every terminal in the Location. Individual terminals can be selected in the Terminal List. When a terminal is selected, it is said to be current. When highlighted, the current terminal will be displayed in the Manual Entry group box. Modifying A Terminal Record: To modify a terminal, highlight it in the Terminal List, make changes to the terminal information in the Manual Entry group box, and click on the Save button. The modified terminal information must be downloaded to the MTX terminal for the changes to take effect. This can be be accomplished for the individual terminal by the Manual Update command or all the terminals using the Auto Update command. Deleting a Terminal: To delete a terminal, highlight the desired terminal in Terminal List and click on the Delete button. The terminal will be removed from the Terminal List. 8-8 TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

218 Set Time: This command is used to remotely set the time on a terminal. To do so, highlight a terminal or terminals from the Terminal List and click on the Set Time button. A Set Time dialog box will appear. It displays the current System Time (Host PC) and Remote Time (terminal) that will be downloaded to the highlighted terminal(s). If a Time Zone Offset was set in the Location Setup tab, it will be reflected in the Remote Time. Also included are the settings for Daylight Saving Time (DST). To download the DST settings, you must place a check in the Daylight Saving Time checkbox, and set the Start and End dates of the DST period in the fields provided. Click on the Download button. A confirmation message will appear when the download is complete. Clear Memory: This command will clear (erase) information from the selected terminal(s). It is recommended that the terminals be polled (uploaded) before executing this command. If the terminal is cleared before it is polled, the data in the terminal will be lost. When the Clear Memory button is selected, a Maintenance dialog box will appear displaying options for clearing terminal data. The choices are: Clear Transaction Data: Only transaction data will be cleared from the terminal. Clear Validation Data: Only the employee validation table will be cleared from the terminal. Clear All: This will clear the entire memory of the terminal and reinitialize it. To clear the terminal, make a selection and click on OK. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on Yes to clear the terminal, No to cancel. When the process is complete, a message will momentarily appear confirming that the terminal was cleared. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-9

219 Relay Setup Tab This Section Describes How to: Create and Modify a Relay Schedule Delete a Relay Schedule Copy a Relay Schedule Assign a Relay Schedule to a Terminal The Relay Setup tab is used to create schedules for controlling the relay circuits of the optional signal kits. One (Signal 1) or two (Signal 1 and Signal 2) Multiple Relay Circuit and Signal & Access Control Kits can be installed in an MTX. A Relay Schedule is a weekly schedule of days, times, and durations (length in seconds) that a relay circuit on a terminal will be activated. Relay circuits on a terminal can be used to activate an audible device such as a bell, buzzer, or an access control device. Once the schedules are created and assigned to terminals in TruTime, they must be downloaded to the terminal(s) to be in effect TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

220 Creating and Modifying A Relay Schedule: Relay schedules are created in the Relay Schedule window. This window is accessed by clicking on the Schedule Setup button in the Relay Setup tab. To create a new schedule, click on the New button. To modify an existing schedule, select one from the Schedule Name drop down list. Schedule Name: Each schedule must have a unique name. Once a new name has been entered, click on the Save button. The schedule name will then be added to the drop-down list and can be used or modified at any time. Relay Number: This number designates which relay circuit the schedule will control. Relay Numbers 1 and 2 refer to the relay connections on Signal 1. Relay Numbers 3 and 4 refer to the those on Signal 2. Only one number can be selected for a schedule. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-11

221 Day of the Week: TruTime allows you to create a separate Relay Schedule for each day of the week. The day is assigned by selecting the appropriate day of the week button. When a day is selected its name will appear highlighted, and all the schedule information for that day should be entered in Detail group box. Detail: The Detail box is divided into two columns, Time and ON/OFF. Enter the time for the relay action to occur in the Time column. The ON/OFF column provides three options: ON, OFF, and Time. When ON is selected the relay will be active from that time until the time it receives an OFF command. If Time is selected you must enter the number of seconds that the relay is to be active. Example A: the relay has been set using Time and will be active for five seconds starting at 7:00am. Example B: ON and OFF setting are being used and the first relay will be active between 7:00am and 8:00 am. Both of these examples repeat themselves through out the day. Example A: Example B: Deleting a Relay Schedule: To delete an entire Relay Schedule (name and schedule), click on the Delete button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the Yes button to delete the entire schedule or the No button to cancel TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

222 Copy Schedule Relay Schedules can be copied from one day to another, Day Copy, or from one schedule to another (Schedule Copy). These two functions are located in the Copy Schedule group box. Day Copy: This command is used to copy the schedule information from one day to another within the same schedule. To do so, perform the following: 1. Select the day of the week you want to copy to from the Day of the Week group box. 2. Click on the Day button in the Copy Schedule group box. A dialog box will appear displaying the days of the week that you can copy from. 3. Make a selection and click on OK. The schedule information will be copied from the day selected within the dialog box to the day selected in the Day of the Week group box. Schedule Copy: This function is used to copy an entire schedule to the currently displayed schedule in the Relay Schedule window. To do so, click on the Schedule button in the Schedule Copy group box. This will open a dialog box which contains a list of all the defined schedules that are available for use. Make a selection from this list and click on OK. The schedule information from the schedule selected in this dialog box will be copied to the current schedule. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-13

223 Assigning Relay Schedules to Terminals: Relay Schedules are assigned to terminals in the Relay Setup tab. To assign a Relay Schedule to a terminal, perform the following: 1. Select a Location from the Location drop down list. 2. Using the Terminal drop down list, select a terminal within the Location. 3. Highlight the Relay Schedules you want to assign to the terminal in the Available Schedules list. Click on the < button to assign the schedule to the terminal. The schedule will then appear in the Selected Schedule field. Each terminal can have only one schedule assigned to it. If you want to remove the schedule from the terminal click on the > button. 4. Once a Relay Schedules has been assigned to a terminal it must be downloaded to the terminal in order for the setting to take effect. Note: The.ACI file should be checked to see that Signal is highlighted. This is done in the Terminal Programming tab TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

224 Terminal Programming Tab This Section Describes How to: Determine and Modify the Existing Application File Residing in an MTX Terminal Download an Application File to the Terminal View the Log File The Terminal Programming tab is used to select and download terminal application (.aci) files to a single MTX terminal, or a group of MTX terminals. The application files downloaded to the terminal are used to define the functionality of the terminal, such as the terminal display and installed hardware. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-15

225 Determining and Modifying the Existing Application File: Terminal Application: This area is used to determine the resident program in a terminal, or select an application file to download to the terminal. The functions of this group box are as follows: Ask Terminal: This command is used to query a terminal to determine which application file is resident in the terminal. To do so, select the terminal(s) from the Terminal List and click on the Ask Terminal button. TruTime will poll the selected terminal(s) and the results will be displayed in the Log File window. Select Application: This command will open the the Terminal Application dialog box which is used to select the application (.aci) file that corresponds to your terminal s display and hardware functions. The dialog box consists of the following: Directory and File name: Select an application file that corresponds to the type of display you want on your terminal and the hardware installed on the terminal. The File name drop down list contains all the application (.ACI) files in the given directory. The default directory for this dialog box is the installed TruTime directory. To change the directory or find a file not in that directory, click on the Browse button. A Windows Open dialog box will appear. Make a selection and click on the OK button. The selected file and its directory path will appear in the appropriate fields. When a file is highlighted in the File name drop down list, a summary of its commands will appear in the Application Info window TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

226 Hardware Configuration: This group box allows you to define the hardware that is installed in your terminal. Reader: This allows you to select and configure the type of reader that will be used with your terminal. Once a selection is made, a configuration dialog box will appear for the reader type selected. Slot Reader: This selection allows you to configure the type and format of the Slot Reader installed on your terminal. For optimum performance of your terminal, it is recommended that you select specific Magnetic or Bar Code formats. Magnetic: Select this option if you are using a Magnetic Card Reader, then select the Track that the information on the card will be read from. Bar Code: Select this option if you are using a Bar Code Reader, then select the configuration of the Bar Code (Code 39 or Interleaved 2 of 5) that will be used with the reader. Any: Select this option if you are not sure of the type or format of Slot Reader that is installed on the terminal. When a card is swiped, the terminal will check the available formats until a match is made. Bar Code Wand: Place a check next to this option if you are using a Bar Code Wand or Scanner on your MTX terminal and click on the Bar Code Type button. Select the Bar Code Type that will be read. If you are unsure of the Bar Code Type, select Any. When a card is swiped, the terminal will check the available formats until a match is made. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-17

227 External Reader: Place a check next to this option if you are using the MTX-EX External Magnetic Reader, an external Proximity Reader, or a Proximity Reader mounted on the terminal. An External Reader Type dialog box will appear that will enable you to configure the reader that will be used. Magnetic Strip: Select this option if you are using the MTX-EX External Magnetic Reader. ANSI Track 2 will automatically be selected when this option is chosen. Proximity: Select this option if a Proximity Reader is used with your terminal. You must specify the configuration of the Proximity Reader you are using. 26 Bits: Select this option if you are using an external Proximity Reader and a Slot Mag Stripe Reader or a Proximity Reader that is installed on the terminal. 26 Bits with Bar Code Reader: Select this option if you are using an external Proximity Reader and a Slot Bar Code Reader. In each case, select the choices that correspond to the equipment installed in the terminal, and click on the OK button to return to the Hardware Configuration window. Options: This drop down list allows you to select the options installed on your terminal. This information must be selected and downloaded to the terminal, otherwise your MTX terminal will not function properly. Communication Line: This drop down list allows you to select the communications type used on your terminal. Converter: Select this option if the MTX host computer communicates with the initial terminal via an RS-232C line and the remainder of the terminals are connected to each other via an RS-485 line. RS-232C: Select this option if the MTX host computer communicates with the terminal via an RS-232C line. RS-485: Select this option if the MTX host computer communicates with the terminal via an RS-485 line. Create Program File: This command converts the selected application (.ACI) file, along with the hardware configuration information into a format (.TAB) that can be read by the terminal s operating system (TOS). This file is then downloaded to the terminal when the download command is executed TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

228 Application Info: This window displays a summary of the commands of the currently selected application (.aci) file in the File name drop down list. Downloading the Application File: Poll Before Download: Placing a check in this checkbox enables you to poll the terminal(s) before downloading the application file. It is recommended that this be checked to avoid losing transaction data. When the download command is executed, the terminal s memory is first cleared, then data is transferred. If this occurs without polling, the unsaved transaction data will be lost. Download: Select the terminal type that you want your terminal to emulate, and click the Download button. This will automatically start a communications session with the terminal. When communications have finished, the following message will appear: Log File: Any command such as Poll or Download, which establishes or attempts to establish communications with a Location and its terminals logs the event to the Log File. The name of this file is COMMMSG.LOG and it is located in the installed TruTime directory. The purpose of the Log File is to store communication events between TruTime and the terminals. It provides documentation as to which locations and terminals a communications session has been established or failed and when. This information can then be used for troubleshooting a communications failure between the Host PC and the terminals. When a communications session is established between the Host PC and the selected terminals, the events that occur during the session are displayed in the Log File window. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-19

229 The operations commands for the Log File window are as follows: Clear Display: This will clear the contents of the display. Load Log File: This will load contents of the Log File (COMMMSG.LOG) into the display. Save Log File: This will save the current contents of the display to the the Log File (COMMMSG.LOG). Config Log File: This button displays the Config Log File dialog box which allows you to configure how the Log File is saved. This dialog box can also be accessed by selecting the Log File command in the Options menu. Overwrite File: (Default) The Log File is overwritten with the contents of the display. Append File: The contents of the display area will be appended to the end of the Log File. Auto Save Log File: (Default) When checked, the Log File will automatically be saved according to the option selected when the communication operation is completed. If Auto Save is not enabled, the contents of the Log File window will be cleared when another communications operation is executed or when the application is terminated by the user or system failure. In this configuration, you must select the Save Log File button after each communications operation for the contents of the Log File window to be saved. To delete the contents of the Log File, perform the following: 1. Select the Load Log File button in the Log File window. This will load the Log File. 2. Click on the Config Log File button, select the Overwrite File option, and disable the Auto Save feature. Click on the OK button. 3. Click on the Clear Display button in the Log File window, and then the Save Log File button. The saved Log File will now be empty. 4. To confirm the operation, click on the Load Log File button. The Log File window should be blank. 5. Click on the Config Log File button, and restore the default settings (Append File and Auto Save enabled). Click on the OK button TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

230 Polling Tab This Section Describes How to: Poll Parameters from a Single Terminal Poll Parameters from a Group of Terminals Poll Parameters from All Terminals The Polling tab is used for manually polling (uploading) data from a single MTX terminal, a group of MTX terminals, or all the MTX terminals that are active and connected to TruTime. Polling should always be performed before attempting any download to prevent the inadvertent loss of data. If the selected terminals are not polled, all the data in the terminals will be lost. Polling Terminals: To poll terminals, perform the following: 1. Select a Location from the Location Name drop down list that the terminals you want to poll belong to. When selected, all the terminals that belong to the Location will appear in the Terminal List. The Terminal List is updated for each Location selected. 2. If you are polling a single terminal or a group of terminals, you must highlight the terminals that you want to poll in the Terminal List. Terminals are highlighted by pointing at the terminal in the Terminal List and clicking on it with the left mouse button. Multiple terminals are highlighted by pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys and clicking on the terminals in the Terminal List with the left mouse button. To deselect an item from the list, click on the Clear All button. This will deselect all the highlighted items in the terminal list. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-21

231 3. Select a Polling Option: The choices are: Selected: Only the selected terminals in the Terminal List will be polled. All Terminals: All terminals in the current Location will be polled. This selection will highlight all the terminals listed in the Terminal List. All Locations: All terminals in all Locations in the system will be polled. This selection will highlight all the terminals listed in the Terminal List. Clicking on the Clear All button will cancel any selected Polling Option. 4. Click on the Polling button. This will execute the Poll command and will cause the terminals to be polled according to the Polling options and terminal selections. When the terminal is polled all transaction data is read from the terminal. Log File: Refer to the Terminal Programming Tab section of this chapter for a complete description of the Log File and its operation TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

232 Download Tab This Section Describes How to: Download Parameters to a Single Terminal Download Parameters to a Group of Terminals Download Parameters to All Terminals The Download tab is used for manually downloading information such as employee information, validation tables, and relay schedules to a single MTX terminal, a group of MTX terminals, or all the MTX terminals that are active and connected to TruTime. Downloading Parameters: To download employee information, validation tables, and relay schedules, perform the following: 1. Select the Location from the Location Name drop down list that contains the terminals where you want to download the information. When selected, all the terminals that belong to the Location will appear in the Terminal List. The Terminal List is updated for each Location selected. 2. If you are downloading to a single terminal or a group of terminals, you must highlight the terminals that you want to download to in the Terminal List. Terminals are highlighted by pointing at the terminal in the Terminal List and clicking on it with the left mouse button. Multiple terminals are highlighted by pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys and clicking on the terminals in the Terminal List with the left mouse button. To deselect an item from the list, click on the Clear All button. This will deselect all the highlighted items in the terminal list. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-23

233 3. Select the type of validation information that you want to download to from the Personal Information group box. 4. Select Relay Schedules if you are downloading them at this time. Only those schedules assigned to terminals in the Relay Setup tab will be downloaded. 5. Select Global Validation if you want employees to have the ability to punch globally, and display a message at each selected terminal. This feature is configured in the Global Validation dialog box, which is accessed by clicking on the Setup button. Highlight each of the Cost Centers, Departments, and Job Classes that you want to include. Employees belonging to each of the selected items will be able to punch globally at the selected terminals. The Line 1 thru 4 fields are used to create up to four lines of text that will be displayed when the employee punches at the terminal. To clear these fields in TruTime after a download, check the Clear Message After Download option. This will clear the fields when the messages are accepted at the terminal. 6. Select a Download Option. The choices are: Selected: Only the selected terminals in the Terminal List will be polled. All Terminals: All terminals in the current Location will be polled. This selection will highlight all the terminals listed in the Terminal List. All Locations: All terminals in all Locations in the system will be polled. This selection will highlight all the terminals listed in the Terminal List. Clicking on the Clear All button will cancel any selected Download Option. 7. Click on the Download button. This will execute the Download command and transfer the selected information from TruTime according to the Download options and terminal selections. Log File: Refer to the Terminal Programming Tab section of this chapter for a complete description of the Log File and its operation TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

234 Clock Maintenance Clock Maintenance is used to configure Amano s ABX-10, AMX-10, TC-500, and MJR-8150 Series terminals for use with TruTime. This includes creating Relay Schedules, setting up programming and terminal parameters, manually polling and downloading, and maintenance functions. These operations are performed in the Terminal Maintenance window, which is opened by selecting the Clock Maintenance selection in the Communication menu. This window consists of four tabs: Terminal Screen (default view), Set/Edit Terminal Settings, Group Set/Add, and Group Delete. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-25

235 Terminal Screen Tab This Section Describes How To: Add Terminals View Terminals within a Site Modify Terminals Delete Terminals Add Additional Terminals The Terminal Screen tab is the default view of the Terminal Maintenance window. The Terminal Screen tab allows you to add, delete, and modify terminals and their communication parameters. When initially used or when there are no clocks listed, the Terminal Maintenance window is in an Add mode which requires you to enter terminals. Once a terminal is added, the Terminal Maintenance will revert to Normal mode which then allows you to add, delete, and modify terminals TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

236 Adding Terminals: To add a terminal to the system, enter or select the following: Site Number: The Site Number directly correlates to the location where there is one or more terminals installed. Select a Site Number (1 to 31) using the drop down list provided. Site Description: This field allows you type in a description to further define each Site Number (example: Building #1, Building #2 or Office). Terminal Number: Enter the number programmed within the terminal at installation. Please refer to the Programming Manual that comes with the terminal for more detailed information. Terminal Description: Type in a description that will correspond to the terminal. Communication Type: Select the type of connection you are using to communicate with the terminals. Direct: The terminal is connected directly to the Com Port of the Host PC. Modem: A modem is used at the Com Port of the Host PC to communicate to the terminal. When selected, the Modem String and Phone Number fields are enabled. Enter in a valid phone number and the Initialization String (up to 30 characters) for your modem. Terminal Types: Select the type of terminal you are using (AMX-10, ABX-10, TC-500 or MJR-8150). Once selected, this cannot be changed. Communication Ports: Select the Com Port of the Host PC that will be used to communicate with the terminal. Baud Rate: Select the Baud Rate for each terminal. The Baud Rate is the amount of information bits per second that will be communicated between the terminal and the Host PC. To save the terminal settings, click on the Save Settings button. Viewing Terminals within A Site: To view terminals within a Site, use the,,, and buttons provided in the upper left corner of the tab to view the first, previous, next, and last numbered terminals in the site. Modifying Terminals: Using the,,, and buttons, select the desired terminal. Once the terminal information appears in the tab, it can be modified. When all modifications have been made, click on the Save Settings button to save your changes. Deleting Terminals: Using the,,, and buttons, select the desired terminal. Once the terminal information appears in the tab, select the Delete a Terminal selection from the Terminal menu or select the Delete (Garbage Can) button in the tool bar. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the Yes button to delete the terminal from the Site. Adding Additional Terminals: To add additional terminals to a new or existing site, select the Add Terminal command from the Terminal menu or click on the Add Terminal button (next to the Delete button) in the toolbar. These commands and buttons will only be enabled if you are in the Terminal Screen tab. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-27

237 Set/Edit Terminal Settings Tab This Section Describes How To: Setup the Operating Parameters of AMX-10/ABX-10 Terminals Setup the Operating Parameters of TC-500 Terminals Setup the Operating Parameters of MJR-8150 Terminals The Set/Edit Terminal Settings tab enables you to setup operating parameters of specified terminals within each site to meet your requirements. The parameter settings available for use with TruTime are dependent upon the Terminal Type selected in the Terminal Screen tab. AMX-10 and ABX-10 Terminals The Set/Edit Terminal Settings tab for AMX-10 and ABX-10 terminals is as follows: To set the operating parameters of an AMX-10 and ABX-10 terminal, perform the following: 1. Select an AMX-10 or ABX-10 terminal to view in the Terminal Screen tab. 2. Click on the Set/Edit Settings tab. The same Site and Terminal Number should appear. 3. Set the following parameters: Time Display Mode: This is the time and date display format for the terminal. The choices are: MM/DD with 24 hour format, MM/DD with 12 hour format, DD/MM with 24 hour format, or DD/MM with 12 hour format. Repeat Control Mode: This controls how consecutive punches for each employee are processed. Repeat Control Period: Enter the amount of time that must pass between the first IN swipe and the next OUT swipe for the same badge number. For example, if the Repeat Control Period is set to three minutes, and an employee punches in at 8:00 am, the employee must wait until 8:04 am before they can punch out TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

238 Accept All Punches: All punches from an employee will be saved. Override Previous Punch: The last punch that occurred within the Repeat Control Period will be saved. No Repeat Punches: No repeat punches will be accepted within the Repeat Control Period. Key Control Mode: This area controls the LED that illuminates the IN/OUT keys on the terminal. Key Control Period: The amount of time (in seconds) that the LED will be illuminated when the IN/OUT keys on the terminal are pressed. For example, if the Key Control Period is set to 3 seconds, and the IN key is pressed, it will remain illuminated for a period of three seconds. Key Light: The employee must press an IN/OUT key before swiping. Key Light Not Required: The employee is not required to press the IN/OUT key to swipe. Daylight Savings: This feature disables or enables the automatic Daylight Saving Time change in the terminal. To disable Daylight Saving Time, select No Daylight Savings. To enable Daylight Saving Time, select Set Month and Date and enter in the month and the date before the Daylight Saving time period will start and end in the fields provided. TruTime will automatically adjust the time at 2:00 am the day following the date placed in the entry box. Contact Relay Mode: This is used to control the signal circuit relay contacts in the terminal. The Relay contacts are used to control an external audible device such as a signal, bell, or horn. Please consult the Terminal Manual regarding relay connections. Contact Relay Period: This setting is the duration or length of time (in seconds) that the relay contact will be activated (open or closed). Relay Closed for Period: The relay will be closed for the duration or length of time (in seconds) specified for the Contact Relay Period. Relay Closed for Odd/Even Contact Numbers: The relay signal circuits will alternately open and close based on the times set in the Signal Schedule table. Bar Code Type (ABX only): This enables you to select the type of Bar Code that will be used with your ABX-10 terminal. The choices are: Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 3 of 9, and NW-7. It is recommended that the terminal be tested immediately following downloading to verify proper programming Label ID (AMX-10 only) This is used to designate the position and character of the employee badge number that represents the start of the data. Field Position: This field designates the location of the Label ID character in the card data string. The Amano standard is 1. Label ID Character: The character that must be encoded at the Field Position entered above for the card to be valid. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-29

239 Data ID (AMX-10 only): This is used to designate the position and character of the employee badge number that represents the start of validity data (other than the employee badge number). Data Field Position: This field designates the location of the Data ID character in the card data string. The Amano standard is 1. Data ID Character: The character that must be encoded at the Data Field Position entered above for the card to be valid. Employee 1, 2, 3 (AMX-10 only): These enable you to select and merge different sections of the employee badge number data string into one Employee Number. The total number of the Employee 1, 2, and 3 Digits of Data fields must not exceed 10. The default setting for all three fields is 0. Field Position: This controls the position of each of the Employee Number sections. Digits of Data: This field defines the number of data digits that start at the corresponding Field Position. The combined Employee 1, 2 and 3 values cannot exceed 10 characters. Lock Out Zone: This setting allows you to set a Lock Out Zone using Start and End times for a specific terminal. LED Change Time: This controls the times in which the IN and OUT keys may be turned on. This is typically used when several employees are entering and leaving the building at the same time. Setting the Signal Schedule: Up to thirty relay signal circuits can be controlled. The Signals 1-15 and Signals buttons enable you to access the Signal Schedule tables. These tables define the relay signal activation times for each day of the week (up to 31 signals). To create a schedule, check the appropriate day of the week and enter a time (in 24 hour format) in the Time field that the desired relay signal circuit number will be activated. The duration (in seconds) that the relay signal circuit will be activated for is set in the Contact Relay Period. When you have selected all the relay signal circuits that you want activated, click on the OK button TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

240 TC-500 Terminals The Set/Edit Terminal Settings tab for TC-500 terminals is as follows: To set the operating parameters of a TC-500 terminal, perform the following: 1. Select a TC-500 terminal to view in the Terminal Screen tab. 2. Click on the Set/Edit Settings tab. The same Site and Terminal Number should appear. 3. Set the following parameters: View Previous Swipe: Select either Yes (enable) or No (disable) to view previously swiped employee badges at the TC-500 terminal. Terminal Display: This field allows you to create a custom display message (up to 30 characters), such as the company name that will appear on the display of the terminal. Enable Daylight Saving: This allows you to enable or disable the automatic Daylight Saving Time adjustment. Time Format: Select either 12 or 24 hour format as the time display format for the terminal. Date Display Mode: Select either DD/MM or MM/DD as the date display format for the terminal. Lookup Messages: Select either Yes (enable) or No (disable) for employees to look up messages at the terminal. Time (Seconds) Display: Select either Yes (enable) or No (disable) to display seconds on the terminal. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-31

241 Signals: Up to thirty relay signal circuits can be controlled. The Signals 1-15 and Signals buttons enable you to access the Signal Schedule tables. These tables define the relay signal activation times for each day of the week (up to 31 signals). Signal Duration: This setting is the duration or length of time (1 thru 99 seconds) that the relay contact will be activated (open or closed). To create a schedule, check the appropriate day of the week and enter a time (in 24 hour format) in the Time field that the desired relay signal circuit number will be activated. The duration (in seconds) that the relay signal circuit will be activated for is set in the Signal Duration field. When you have selected all the relay signal circuits that you want activated, click on the OK button. MJR-8150 Terminals MJR-8150 terminals do not have any terminal parameter settings that can be set in the Set/Edit Terminal Settings tab. If you click on the Set/Edit Terminal Settings tab, the following message will appear: To clear the message, click on the OK button TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

242 Group Set/Add Tab This Section Describes How To: Create a Group View a Group Assign Terminals to a Group The Group Set/Add tab is used to Group terminals together for polling and downloading. A Group may consist of one or more similar terminals. For MJR-8150 or TC-500 terminals, each employee must be assigned a Group in the Employee Master to download valid employee badge numbers and Departments. Creating a Group: To create a Group, perform the following: 1. In the Group No. field, enter in a Group Number. 2. Type in a description for the group (up to thirty characters) in the Group Description field. 3. Click on the Save button. Viewing Groups: To view existing Groups, use the,,, and buttons provided in the upper left corner of the tab to view the first, previous, next, and last Group by Group Number. Assigning Terminals to a Group: Perform the following to assign a terminal to a Group: 1. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired Group Number or enter the Group Number that you want assigned to the terminal. 2. Highlight the terminals from the Site Number/Terminal Number list. 3. Click on the Save button. A message will appear to confirm the operation, select Yes to continue. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-33

243 Group Delete This Section Describes How To: Remove a Terminal from a Group Delete a Group The Group Delete tab is used to remove a terminal from a Group or delete an entire Group. Deleting a Terminal: To delete a terminal from a Group, perform the following: 1. Click on the Group Delete tab or select the Group Delete command from the Group Parameters menu. 2. Select the Group Number to delete the terminal from the Group Number drop down list. 3. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired terminal that you want to delete. 4. Click on the Delete Terminal button. A message will appear to confirm the operation, select Yes to continue. Deleting a Terminal Group: To delete a terminal Group, perform the following: 1. Click on the Group Delete tab or select the Group Delete command from the Group Parameters menu. 2. Select the Group Number you want to delete using the Group Number drop down list. 3. Click on the Delete Group button. A message will appear to confirm the operation. Click on the Yes button to continue TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

244 Polling This Section Describes How To: Manually Poll AMX-10, ABX-10, TC-500 and MJR-8150 Terminals Create Auto Poll Schedules Enable Auto Polling The Polling module is used for manually polling from and setting up automatic polling for AMX-10, ABX-10, TC-500 and MJR-8150 terminals. When properly configured and enabled, the Auto Mode (automatic polling) will automatically retrieve data from the terminals at the programmed times. The polling schedule for the Auto Mode is accessed through the Edit Polling Times button. Once the terminal data has been polled, it is automatically processed. Manual Polling: This group box enables you to manually poll a single terminal, a group of terminals, or all terminals connected to TruTime. Polling a Single Terminal: To poll a single terminal, perform the following: 1. Click the Single Terminal button in the Manual Polling group box. A Single Terminal window will appear: 2. Select a Site Number from the Site Number list box. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-35

245 3. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired terminal that you want to poll. 4. Click on the Poll button. This will initiate a communication session between the Host PC and the selected terminals. Poll a Group of Terminals: To poll a group of terminals, perform the following: 1. Click on the Group button in the Manual Polling group box. A Group window will appear: 2. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired Group that you want to poll. 3. Click on the Poll button. This will initiate a communication session between the Host PC and the selected terminals. Poll All Terminals: To poll all AMX-10, ABX-10, TC-500 and MJR-8150 terminals connected to the Host PC, perform the following: 1. Click on the Poll button in the Manual Polling group box. This will initiate a communication session between the Host PC and all the terminals. 2. A Polling message will appear, click on Yes to start polling or Cancel TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

246 Auto Mode: The Auto Mode will automatically poll (upload) data from the selected terminals at the programmed times and days of the week. Creating an Auto Poll Schedule: To create an auto poll schedule, perform the following: 1. Click on the Edit Polling Times button in the Auto Polling group box, the Edit Polling Schedule window will appear: 2. Up to twelve auto polling schedules can be set. Click on the days of the week that you want a desired schedule (Poll Time) to run. 3. In the Time field, enter in the time (in 24 hour format) that you want the desired schedule (Poll Time) to run. 4. Using the Group Number drop down list, select the Group Number of the terminals you want to poll in the desired schedule (Poll Time). 5. Repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until you have entered all times for the groups to be polled. 6. Click on the Save button to save your schedules or Cancel to quit without saving. Enabling an Auto Poll Schedule: To enable the Auto Mode (auto poll schedule) click on the Enable Auto Mode button. A Polling message will appear. Click on Yes to enable the auto poll schedule or No to disable it. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-37

247 Downloading This Section Describes How To: Download the Parameters to AMX-10, ABX-10, TC-500, or MJR-8150 Terminals Download the Time to AMX-10, ABX-10, TC-500, or MJR-8150 Terminals Download Departments to TC-500 or MJR-8150 Terminals The Download module is used for downloading the program parameters to a single terminal, a group of terminals, or all AMX-10, ABX-10, TC-500, or MJR-8150 terminals connected to TruTime. Downloading terminal parameters should only be performed once during the initial setup of the terminal. Before you execute this function, please contact your local TruTime dealer or support. Terminal Parameters: This group of commands is used to download terminal parameters from the Host PC to a single terminal, a group of terminals, or all terminals. This feature is not applicable for MJR-8150 terminals. All programming for the MJR-8150 must be performed at the terminal. Single Terminal: To download terminal parameters to a single terminal, perform the following: 1. Click on the Single Terminal button in the Terminal Parameters group box. A Single Terminal window will appear: 2. Select a Site Number from the Site Number list box. 3. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired terminal that you want to download to. 4. Click on the Download button. A Downloading to Terminals message will appear TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

248 Group of Terminals: To download terminal parameters to a group of terminals, perform the following: 1. Click on the Group button in the Terminal Parameters group box. A Single Terminal window will appear. 2. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired Group where you want to download. 3. Click on the Download button. A Downloading to Terminals message will appear. For proper operation, a Group containing an MJR-8150 terminal should not be selected. All Terminals: To download terminal parameters to all terminals, perform the following: 1. Click on the All Terminals button in the Terminal Parameters group box. 2. A Download to all terminals message will appear, click on Yes to start polling or Cancel. If an MJR terminal was connected, an MJR-8150 has no parameters to download message will appear. Set Time: This group of commands is used to download the time from the Host PC to a single terminal, a group of terminals, or all terminals. This feature is not applicable for MJR-8150 terminals. Single Terminal: To download the time to a single terminal, perform the following: 1. Click on the Single Terminal button in the Set Time group box. A Single Terminal window will appear. 2. Select a Site Number from the Site Number list box. 3. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired terminal where you want to download the time. 4. Click on the Download button. A Downloading to Terminals message will appear. Group of Terminals: To download the time to a group of terminals, perform the following: 1. Click on the Group button in the Set Time group box. A Group window will appear: 2. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired Group where you want to download the time. 3. Click on the Download button. A Downloading to Terminals message will appear. For proper operation, a Group containing an MJR-8150 terminal should not be selected. All Terminals: To download the time to all terminals, perform the following: 1. Click on the All Terminals button in the Set Time group box. 2. A Download to all terminals message will appear, click on Yes to start polling or Cancel. If an MJR terminal was connected, an MJR-8150 has no parameters to download message will appear. Employ/Dept: This command is used to download Departments to a group of terminals. This feature is not applicable for ABX-10 and AMX-10 terminals. 1. Click on the Group button in the Employ/Dept group box. A Group window will appear: 2. Use the,,, and buttons to display the desired Group that you want to download the Departments to. 3. Click on the Download button. A Downloading to Terminals message will appear. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-39

249 Non-ACI Terminals Polling/Downloading This section will explain how to configure and use non-aci data collection terminals with TruTime. This module enables you to administrate RSI HandPunch, Kronos 45/55 and System 400, and CMI 1600 Series terminals. The chart below lists all supported terminals and features. Notes: 1. Depends on model 2. Positive (+) adjustments only The Non-ACI Terminals module consists of the following: Locations: Enables you to define the site or area where Non-ACI terminals are located and the type of terminal used. Relays: Weekly Relay Schedules can be created for use in this tab. Terminals: Non-ACI terminals are added, configured, and removed from the system through their Location in this tab. Assignments: Employees are assigned to terminals in this tab. Download: This tab contains the commands that allow you to download validation tables. Polling: This tab contains the commands that enable you to poll transaction data and biometric hand templates from the terminals. Employee Terminal Information: Employees biometric terminal information can be viewed and remotely modified in this window. Terminal Message Settings: This option enables you to automatically create a detailed log of terminal transactions TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

250 Locations Tab This Section Describes How to: Create a Location Save a Location View Locations Modify a Location Delete a Location A Location is used to define the type of non-aci terminals used and the site or area where they are located. A Location can be a complete building, a section within a building, or any other area.. Up to 31 terminals of the same type can be in the same Location. Creating A Location: To create or add a Location, click on the New button in the toolbar, and enter the following information: Location Name: This describes the area or site where the Non-ACI terminals are located. Locations are created using the New command. Each name must be unique, and can be from 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters long. Time Zone Offset: This is used to calculate the time difference between the Host PC and the Location (terminals) if they are located in different time zones. The default value is 0:00, and an offset can be set by using the drop down list provided. The Time Zone Offset selected will be used in the calculation of the Remote Time (terminal time) that appears in the Set Time dialog box of the Terminals tab. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-41

251 Term Type: This drop down list is used to define the terminal type and model used in the Location. Currently each Location definition supports only one terminal type. Connect Type: This field defines the communications used between the Host PC and the terminal(s) in the Location. The chart below lists the available Connect Types for each terminal type: Direct: The terminals in the Location are connected directly to the Com Port of the Host PC. Modem: Select this when a Hayes compatible modem is used to communicate between the Host PC and an RSI HandPunch terminal, or when a modem is used with a Kronos or CMI terminal. This selection will enable the Modem group box. Non-Hayes: A non-hayes compatible modem is used to communicate between the Host PC and an RSI HandPunch terminal. This selection will enable the Modem group box. Network: Terminals are connected to the Host PC via an initial terminal on a TCP/IP network. This selection will enable the Network group box. Communications Port: This defines the Host PC s Com Port that is connected to the terminals or used for the modem. Baud Rates are determined by the Terminal Type and Connect Type used. For the Modem and Non-Hayes Connect Types, the recommended Baud Rate for all terminals is Network: This is enabled when Network is chosen as the Connect Type and requires you to enter the designated IP Address of the terminal connected to the Host PC TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

252 Modem: Enabled if Modem or Non-Hayes Connect Types are used and requires a phone number (up to fifty characters). For an RSI HandPunch terminal using a non-hayes compatible modem, you have the option of enabling or disabling the modem s speaker. Kronos and CMI terminals require you to select a compatible modem from the Modem Name list provided. This list is stored in a file named AWMODEM.INI and is installed in the Windows directory during TruTime installation. Saving A Location: Once all the Location information has been entered, click on the Save button. Viewing Locations: Use the,,, and buttons provided to view a Location that is not in the current display. Modifying A Location: To modify a Location, select the Location from the drop down list and edit the desired fields. To save changes, click on the Save button. If the Location Name is changed, a new Location will be created. Deleting A Location: To delete a Location, select the desired Location from the drop down list and click on the Delete button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. To delete the Location, click on the Yes button. To cancel, click on the No button. You must remove all terminals assigned to a Location before attempting to delete it. Refer to the Terminals tab for this procedure. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-43

253 Relays Tab This Section Describes How to: Create a Relay Schedule Check a Relay Schedule for Errors Delete a Relay Schedule A Relay Schedule is a weekly schedule of days, times, and durations that a terminal s relay circuits, which control external devices, will be activated. Creating a Relay Schedule: The first step in creating a Relay Schedule is to assign it a name. To do so, select the New command and enter a unique name (up to twenty alphanumeric characters) for the schedule in the Schedule Name field. Once a Schedule Name has been entered, click on the Save button. To modify the name, click on the Modify button. This command will only affect the Schedule Name and not the actual schedule. To save the changes made, click on the Save button. To create the actual schedule, select the New button above the schedule grid. A highlighted (default) value of one second will appear in the Duration column. This value can be up to 32 seconds, excluding zero TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

254 After the Duration has been set, enter the time, in 24 hour format, that you want the relay to activate for each day of the week. Movement to each column is accomplished by clicking on each cell or pressing the Tab key. Multiple activation times require additional rows. A new row can be added to the schedule by: pressing the Tab or Enter key in the last (Sat) column pressing the Down Arrow key from any column clicking on the Save button and then clicking on the New button in the Schedule window. Checking the Relay Schedule for Errors The schedule is saved using the Save button above the schedule grid, which automatically scans the schedule for errors. If there were no errors or conflicts in the schedule, a message will appear stating that the schedule was formatted correctly. If a time conflict is found, a warning message will appear, and the row that contains the error will be highlighted. To correct the conflict, you can either use the Modify (to change the time) or Delete (to delete the entire row) buttons above the schedule grid. If an invalid character was entered, a warning message will appear displaying the field, and the field containing the invalid character will be highlighted. To correct the error, you can either use the Modify (to the entry) or Delete (to delete the entire row) buttons above the schedule grid. To manually check a schedule for errors, click on the Check button in the upper left hand corner of the schedule grid. Deleting the Entire Relay Schedule: To delete the entire Relay Schedule (name and schedule), use the Delete button. A dialog box will appear to confirm the deletion. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-45

255 Terminals Tab This Section Describes How to: Add a Terminal Record Save a Terminal Record View a Terminal Record Modify a Terminal Record Delete a Terminal Record Set the Clock Display on a Terminal Use Advanced Setup for RSI and CSI Terminals Terminals are defined by their Location, Terminal Number, Usage, and Relay Schedule. The Terminal tab enables you to set these parameters and remotely program, upload, and clear terminal data. Adding A Terminal: Terminals are added by referencing their Location. To add a terminal, use the New command and enter the following: Location Name: Select the Location of the terminals you are adding. Terminal Number: Terminals within a Location are distinguished by their Terminal Number. These numbers are either user entered or numbered by default in the order that they are added to the system. The Terminal Number must be the same as the number assigned at the terminal during installation. Refer to your terminal s documentation for assigning numbers and network connections TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

256 The maximum number of terminals in each Location is dependent upon the type of terminal used. The chart below lists the maximum number of terminals allowed, and valid Terminal Number ranges. Terminal Name: Each terminal must be given a unique name (1 to 20 alphanumeric characters) that will be used to reference it. Usage: You must specify terminal usage so transactions can be processed as either in/out (Time Clock) or Access Control punches. All terminal transactions are logged in the AUPOLL.DAT file. Relay Schedule: This drop down list is used to assign a relay schedule to a terminal. Saving A Terminal Record: Terminals are saved using the Save command. Once saved, the terminal record will appear in the Terminal List. This list contains the name and number of every active terminal in a Location. To perform operations in this tab, a terminal, or group of terminals must be selected from this list. Terminals are selected by pointing at the desired terminal and clicking on it with the left mouse button. Multiple terminals are selected by pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys while clicking on the desired terminals with the left mouse button. Viewing Terminal Records: Terminals not currently displayed can be viewed by using the,,, and buttons provided or by selecting terminal records in the Terminal List. Modifying A Terminal Record: To modify a terminal record, use the Modify command. Deleting Terminals: Before attempting to delete a terminal from a Location, you must remove any employee assignments in the terminal and schedules assigned to it in the Auto Process module. Terminals are deleted by using the Delete command. A dialog box will appear to confirm the deletion. If the terminal is currently displayed, clicking on the No button in the dialog box will deselect it. If you have selected multiple terminals for deletion, a confirmation dialog box will appear for each terminal in the order of the Terminal Number. The options for each dialog box are: Yes: The terminal displayed will be deleted. No: The terminal displayed will not be deleted. Cancel: All remaining terminal deletions will be cancelled. If this is the first terminal, all deletions will be cancelled. All: All remaining terminals will be deleted. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-47

257 Set Time: This button is enabled when terminals are selected from the Terminal List. Clicking this button will display the Set Time dialog. The Time Zone Offset entered in the Locations tab will be reflected in the Remote Time. Clicking the OK button will download the displayed Remote Time to the terminal if the communications between the Host PC and terminals are working and properly configured. This action will be recorded in the Log File, and can be viewed in the Log File window of the Polling and Download tabs. The Set Time dialog box also contains options for DST, which is supported for Kronos and RSI HandPunch terminals, but not for CMI terminals. For these terminals, you must enable the Download DST feature and specify the dates and times that the time change will be in effect. The terminals should always be set for the next time change. Advanced Setup: This button is enabled when RSI HandPunch or CMI terminals are selected in the Terminal List. This is used to view, set, or change a terminal s configuration parameters. Always refer to the terminal s documentation before attempting to modify or alter a terminal s configuration parameters. RSI HandPunch Terminals: For a single terminal, this will display the default parameters if newly added, or the last set of parameters, if existing. If multiple terminals are selected, only the default parameters will be displayed. The Application drop down list is used to select a HandPunch application file. These files contain the menu commands for supported terminal functions. To use these functions, the Job Class, Department, and Cost Center codes must consist of numeric characters. The application files for each terminal are as follows: hp+.hpm (HandPunch +): The following can be performed at the terminal: hp2-3.hpm (HandPunch 2000 and 3000): The following can be performed at the terminal: For the Show Previous (F2) function, refer to Show User History (F8) function in the hp4.hpm application for punch codes TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

258 hp3ap1.hpm (HandPunch 3000 only): This application allows the user to use the HandPunch 3000 as an access control terminal. The F2 button must be pressed for employees to punch, and the terminal usage must be set to Access Control in the Terminal section of the Polling and Download tabs. The following can be performed at the terminal: hp4.hpm (HandPunch 4000): The following can be performed at the terminal: Job Transfer (F1): Transfer Job Class only. Department Transfer (F2): Transfer Department only. Cost Center Transfer (F3): Transfer Cost Center only. All Transfer (F4): Transfer Cost Center, Department, and Job Class. This selection requires that all three be transferred Explicit Punch (F5): The terminal transactions will be processed as an in/out punch when the terminal Usage is set to Access Control. Hours Worked (F6): Displays the hour balance of the REG, OT, and MSC Pay Code Hour categories as defined in the Pay Code module. The user will be prompted to press the # key to display each category. Benefit Time (F7): Displays Benefit Time balances from the Benefit Time tab of the Employee Master or TruAccruals. Since the HP4000 displays the first five Pay Codes it encounters, it is recommended that five or less benefit time Pay Codes be used. The user must press the # key to display each balance. Show User History (F8): Displays previous terminal transactions by time and code. The # (Next) or * (Previous) keys are used to scroll through the transactions. This function is the same as the Show Previous (F2) function for the hp2-3.hpm application. Once the parameters have been set, click on the OK button to save any changes. This will initiate a download session with the selected terminal(s) and return you to the Terminals tab when the download is complete. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-49

259 CMI Terminals: The CMI Setup window consists of the following: Application: This drop down list is used to select CMI terminal (.CMI) application files for viewing or download. These files contain terminal operating parameters and downloaded by clicking on the Download button. Supervisor Setup: This is used to select employees that will have supervisory privileges at the terminal. To do so, select employees from the Employees list. These selections will be downloaded in the Download tab provided that the Supervisors option is checked. CMI Pro: This utility is accessed by clicking on the CMI Pro button. If no selection was made from the Application drop down list, CMI Pro will be launched with default terminal settings. Otherwise, the selected application file will be loaded. CMI Pro consists of the following: File Menu: New: Create a new application file. Open: View an existing application file. Save As: Save the currently displayed application file. Exit: Exit CMI Pro TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

260 General Settings: This tab allows you to set general terminal settings such as: Download Label: This is a five character alphanumeric field that the terminal uses to recognize the application file. Date/Time Display: This group allows you to enable or disable the date and time functions on the terminal display. If the time is enabled, you can select a 12 or 24 hour display format. Badge Input: Select either Bar Code and Magnetic Stripe. Validation Information: These fields are used to set the field lengths of the terminal s validation tables. They must be set to accommodate the tables in your database and the data entered at the terminal. To conserve terminal memory, field lengths can be shortened if the length of your data is less then the default value. If a field length is set too small, a Download Error message will appear on the terminal display and be recorded in the Log File when the validation tables are downloaded in the Download tab. Badge Length: The number of digits in the Badge Number. The default value is nine. Max Emps: The total number of employees that can be downloaded to the terminal. For new terminals, this field is defaulted to the number of employee records in the database plus ten. Job Length: The number of digits in the Job Class. The default value is nine. Max Jobs: The total number of Job Classes that can be downloaded to the terminal. For new terminals, this field is defaulted to the number of Job Classes in the database plus five. Department Length: This is the total number of digits in the Department. Default value is ten. Max Departments: The total number of Departments that can be downloaded to the clock. For new terminals, this field is defaulted to the number of Departments in the database plus five. Cost Center Length: The total number of digits in the Cost Center. Default value is nine. Max Cost Centers: The total number of Cost Centers that can be downloaded to the clock. For new terminals, this field is defaulted to the number of Cost Centers in the database plus five. Pay Code Length: The total number of digits in the Pay Code. Default value is three. Max Pay Codes: The total number of Pay Codes that can be downloaded to the clock. For new terminals, this field is defaulted to the number of Pay Codes in the database plus five. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-51

261 Supervisor Options: This allows you to set the total number of Supervisors that can be downloaded to the terminal and how their Badge Number is to be entered. Validate: The Badge Number entered will be validated by the terminal. Keyboard: The Badge Number must be entered at the keyboard. Badge: The Badge Number must be entered using the badge reader. Both: The Badge Number can be entered using a keyboard or the badge reader. Max: The total number of Supervisors that can be downloaded to the clock. This number is defaulted to the number of employees selected as Supervisors in the CMI Setup dialog box. If the number entered here is greater than that number, memory will be allocated for the additional supervisors when the (.CMI) application file is downloaded to the terminal. If it is less, a Download Error message will appear on the terminal display and in the Log File. Function Keys Tab: This tab is used to enable or disable use of the terminal s functions, and how the transactions for each are input and handled. The Key drop down is used to select the function keys. Each function key represents a specific terminal function. Enabled: When checked, the function will be enabled. If the checkbox is disabled (grayed out), the function is enabled by default. Restricted: The function can only be accessed by a Supervisor Badge Number. If the checkbox is disabled (grayed out), the function is unavailable. Validate: The Badge Number entered will be validated by the terminal. Keyboard: The Badge Number must be entered at the keyboard. Badge: The Badge Number must be entered using the badge reader. Both: The Badge Number can be entered using the keyboard or the badge reader TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

262 The terminal functions are as follows: Main: This is the display of the terminal when it is in idle mode. This display consists of the name entered in the Company Name field of the System Configuration module. The Access field is used to specify the number of seconds that a door switch will be open when the terminal is used as an access control device. When set to zero, this feature is disabled. Last Ring Lookup (F0): An employee s previous punches can be displayed on the terminal by pressing the F0 key. The user will be prompted to enter the Badge Number. Job Transfer (F1): The user can perform a Job Transfer at the terminal by pressing the F1 key. The user will be prompted to enter a Badge Number and Job Class. Department Transfer (F2): This allows Department Transfers to be performed at the terminal by pressing the F2 key. The user will be prompted to enter a Badge Number and Department. Cost Center Transfer (F3): A Cost Center Transfer can be performed at the terminal by pressing the F3 key. The user will be prompted to enter a Badge Number and Cost Center. Cost Center/Department/Job Transfer (F4): A Cost Center/Department/Job Transfer can be performed at the terminal by pressing the F4 key. The user will be prompted to enter a Badge Number, Job Class, Department, and Cost Center. Add Punch (F5): An Add Punch transaction can be performed at the terminal by pressing the F5 key. The user will be prompted to enter a Badge Number, Date (yymmdd), and Time (hhmm). Add Hours (F6): An Add Hours transaction can be performed at the terminal by pressing the F6 key. The user will be prompted to enter a Badge Number, Pay Code, Date (yymmdd), and Time (hhmm). Biometric Maps: This set of commands is enabled when RSI HandPunch terminals are selected in the Terminal List. The terminals must be polled before using any of these three commands. Polling the terminals will: save any biometric hand templates for newly enrolled employees; automatically update templates for employees who have punched at the terminal in the database; and create terminal assignments provided that the corresponding employees are in the Employee Master. If the newly enrolled employee does not exist in the Employee Master, then the template in the terminal will not be saved. If the template data is inadvertently lost, it must be reassigned to the terminal through the Assignments tab or Employee Terminal Information window. In addition, since these commands result in communication events with the corresponding terminals, the action and data of each will be recorded in the Log File, COMMMSG.LOG. This file can be viewed in the Download and Polling tabs. Messages for newly enrolled employees will only appear once in the Log File. Each time an employee punches at the terminal, their hand template will automatically be updated in the Employee Master with the most recent template from the terminal. This is provided for maintaining accurate hand templates. However, if the employee does not exist in the Employee Master, then a message will be logged to the Log File, and Undefined Data. Once the employee is added to the Employee Master, the template for that employee will not be automatically uploaded unless: the employee is removed from and re-enrolled at the terminal; or a punch is received from the terminal in which case the employee s template will be saved and an assignment will automatically be created. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-53

263 Download: This button will download biometric hand templates from the employee database to the selected terminals. Only templates assigned to the terminals will be downloaded. Employees are assigned to terminals in the Assignments tab, Employee Terminal Information window, or by polling. Because the download operation consists of first clearing all templates from the terminal and then downloading assigned employee templates, a confirmation dialog box will appear before this command executes. This is to prevent the unwanted deletion of employee templates. Click on the Yes button to continue or No to cancel the operation. Upload: This command will upload employee templates from the selected terminals and save them in the database. Only templates assigned to the terminals will be uploaded. Employees are manually assigned to terminals in the Assignments tab, in the Employee Terminal Information window. Clear Terminal: This will clear (delete) all employee templates from the selected terminals. A confirmation dialog box will appear before this command executes to prevent the unwanted deletion of employee templates. Click on the Yes button to continue or No to cancel the operation TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

264 Assignments Tab This Section Describes How to: Assign an Employee to a Single Terminal or a Group of Terminals Remove an Employee Assignment from a Single Terminal or a Group of Terminals The Assignments tab is used to manually assign employees to a terminal or a group of terminals. Polling a terminal will automatically create terminal assignments provided that the corresponding employees in the terminal already exist in the Employee Master. The Assignments tab consists of the Locations/Terminals and Employees lists. The Locations/Terminal list displays all the Locations in the system and their terminals. Selecting one or more of the terminals allows the user to assign employees to the selection. When a terminal is selected, the employees assigned to it will be displayed in the Employees list. If multiple terminals are selected, only employees common to all selected terminals will be displayed. The contents of this list can be sorted in order of ID, Badge Number, and Employee Name. This is accomplished by clicking on the desired column heading. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-55

265 Assigning Employees to Terminals Manually Assigning Employees: To manually assign employees to terminals, perform the following: 1. Select a terminal or terminals from the Locations/Terminals list. 2. With the terminal selections highlighted, select the New button. The Range dialog box will appear. The Range dialog box is grouped by Cost Center, Department, Job, and Pay Class categories. The default selection for these is All. To select a range of employees from specific groups within a category, click on that category s Select button. This will highlight all the groups within the category. To deselect an item, click on it. To deselect a group of items, use the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting items. Only those items or groups highlighted will be assigned TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

266 To select an individual or a group of employees from within a specific group or category, click on the Employee button. All the employees that belong to the specific group or category will be displayed in the Employee dialog box. All the employees in the list can be selected by clicking on the Select All button. Individual employees are selected by clicking on a single name or by holding down the Shift or Ctrl keys for selecting multiple employees. 3. Once selections are made, click on the OK button to exit the Employee dialog, then click on OK to exit the Range dialog box. 4. The employee assignments will appear in the Employees list for the selected terminal(s). These assignments have to be downloaded to the terminal(s) to be in effect. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-57

267 Deleting Employee Assignments: To delete employee terminal assignments, perform the following: 1. Select the terminal(s) where you want to delete the employee(s). If you are selecting multiple terminals, only the employee assignments common to those terminals will be displayed in the Employees list. 2. Select the employee names from the Employees list to be deleted. 3. Once a selection is made, use the Delete command. 4. A confirmation dialog box will appear. If multiple terminals are selected, all the terminals will be listed. 5. If the selected employees have biometric hand templates, you will be prompted to select one of the following options for each employee: Yes: This will delete the employee s biometric template information from the employee database, and then proceed to the next selected employee assignment. No: The employee s biometric template information will not be deleted. TruTime will then proceed to the next operation if multiple employee assignments are selected. Cancel: This command will not delete the displayed employee s biometric template information from the employee database, and cancel any remaining operations. All: This command will delete all the selected employees biometric template information from the employee database TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

268 Download Tab This Section Describes How to: Download Parameters to Terminals View, Print, Delete and Configure the Contents of the Log File The Download tab is used for manually downloading information such as employee terminal assignments, validation tables, and relay schedules to the connected non-aci terminals. Download To download employee terminal assignments, validation tables, and relay schedules to terminals, perform the following: 1. Select a Location from the Location Name drop down list. When selected, all the terminals that belong to the Location will appear in the Terminal List. The Terminals List is updated for each Location selected. 2. If you are downloading to a single terminal or a group of terminals, you must highlight the terminals that you want to download to in the Terminal List. Terminals are highlighted by pointing at the terminal in the Terminal List and clicking on it with the left mouse button. Multiple terminals are highlighted by pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys and clicking on the terminals in the Terminal List with the left mouse button. To deselect an item from the list, click on the Clear Options button. This will deselect all the highlighted items in the terminal list. 3. Select the validation tables and schedules that you want to download. The tables and schedules available for download depend on the terminal type used in the Location. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-59

269 CMI Terminals: CMI terminals are limited to receiving only the current day s Relay Schedule. If the memory allocation for a validation table was insufficiently set in CMI Pro, a Download Error message will be recorded in the Log File. RSI HandPunch Terminals: The available schedules and validation tables vary with the terminal used. Kronos Terminals: The following are available: Refer to the Kronos terminal s documentation for setting up and utilizing these options. 4. Select a Download Option: The choices are: Selected: Only the selected terminals in the Terminal List will be polled. All Terminals: All terminals in the current Location will be polled. This selection will highlight all the terminals listed in the Terminal List. All Locations: All terminals in all Locations in the system will be polled. This selection will highlight all the terminals listed in the Terminal List. Clicking on the Clear Options button will cancel any selected Download Option. 5. Click on the Download button. This will execute the Download command and transfer the selected information from TruTime according to the Download options and terminal selections. Log File: Refer to the Terminal Programming Tab section of MTX Manual Polling/Download chapter for a complete description of the Log File and its operation TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

270 Polling Tab This Section Describes How to: Poll Terminals for Data View, Print, Delete and Configure The Polling tab is used to manually poll data from the connected non-aci terminals. Polling should always be performed before attempting any download to prevent the inadvertent loss of data. If the selected terminals are not polled, all the data in the terminals will be lost. Polling Terminals To poll terminals, perform the following: 1. Select a Location from the Location Name drop down list that the terminals you want to poll belong to. When selected, all the terminals that belong to the Location will appear in the Terminal List. The Terminals List is updated for each Location name selected. 2. If you are polling a single terminal or a group of terminals, you must highlight the terminals that you want to poll in the Terminal List. Terminals are highlighted by pointing at the terminal in the Terminal List and clicking on it with the left mouse button. Multiple terminals are highlighted by pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys and clicking on the terminals in the Terminal List with the left mouse button. To deselect an item from the list, click on the Clear Options button. This will deselect all the highlighted items in the terminal list. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-61

271 3. Select a Polling Option: The choices are: Selected: Only the selected terminals in the Terminal List will be polled. All Terminals: All terminals in the current Location will be polled. This selection will highlight all the terminals listed in the Terminal List. All Locations: All terminals in all Locations in the system will be polled. This selection will highlight all the terminals listed in the Terminal List. Selecting the Clear Options button will deselect any selected Polling Option. 4. Click on the Polling button. This will execute the Poll command and will cause the terminals to be polled according to the Polling options and terminal selections. When the terminal is polled all transaction data is read from the terminal. If the Sync Time box is checked, TruTime will synchronize the time on the terminal with the PC s time and date. Log File: Refer to the Terminal Programming Tab section of MTX Manual Polling/Download chapter for a complete description of the Log File and its operation TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

272 Employee Terminal Information This Section Describes How to: Assign Employee Biometric Terminal Information View Employee Biometric Terminal Information Modify Employee Biometric Terminal Information Globally Apply Employee Biometric Terminal Information Download Employee Biometric Terminal Information The Employee Biometric Terminal Information window allows you to remotely view and modify the terminal settings of individual employees assigned to the RSI HandPunch. This feature is only for use with RSI HandPunch terminals and those employees with biometric hand templates. Hand templates are created at an RSI HandPunch terminal when employees are enrolled and are saved to the database when the terminal is polled. This window is accessed by selecting the Employee Terminal Info command. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-63

273 Assigning Information Employee Information: This section displays read-only information from the Employee Master such as the Employee Name, ID Number, Badge Number, and status (Inactive or Active). Terminal Info: Allows you to set the Authority Level, Reject Threshold, and Lock Out for each employee. Authority Level: This drop down list enables you to assign an Authority Level or Command Mode Group to the employee. These groups allow access to commands in the RSI HandPunch for employee enrollments, system management, and service operations. Refer to the HandPunch s documentation for detailed information on each Command Mode Group s functions, operations and structure: None: No Command Mode Group. Service: Access to service and diagnostic functions. Setup: Set the baud rate and number of the terminal. Management: General system management operations. Enrollment: Enroll and remove users. Security: Allows persons who are unable to use the HandPunch because of a disability or other infirmity to be enrolled. Enrolling employees through this Command Group disables the hand reading checks in the HandPunch. Reject Threshold: This drop down list allows you to adjust the sensitivity of the terminal to the employee s hand geometry. The default value is 125, but it can be set to a value between 30 and 250. A lower number indicates high sensitivity. Lock Out: When checked, the employee cannot punch in. Messages: Line 1 and 2 are used to create up to two lines of text that can be displayed when the employee punches at the terminal. The options for automatically clearing these fields in TruTime are the following: Clear Above Lines After Download: When checked, this option will clear Message Line 1 and 2 in TruTime after a message is downloaded to and accepted at the terminal. Delete After Receiving Punch: When checked, this option will instruct the application to delete the display message after the terminal has been polled and a terminal transaction has been received into the database. Locations/Terminals: This area lists currently displayed employee s terminal assignments TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

274 Viewing an Employee s Biometric Information: Use the Open command to view an employee s Biometric Terminal Information. A Select Employee dialog box will appear. Select an employee from the list and click on the OK button. If a biometric hand template does not exist for the selected employee, a warning message will appear. Modifying an Employee s Biometric Information: To modify an employee s Biometric Terminal Information, use the Modify command. To save the changes made, use the Save command. The changes made to the employee record have to be downloaded to the terminal to be in effect. This is accomplished in the Download tab. Global Apply: To globally apply the currently displayed employee s Biometric Terminal Information to other employee records, select the Global Apply command. The Globally Apply dialog box will appear. Check the items that you want to globally assign and click on the OK button. These items will be saved in the database and must be downloaded to the terminal to be in effect. Download: Employee Terminal Information is downloaded to terminals in the Download tab. To download messages, you must check the Messages selection in the Download tab. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-65

275 Terminal Message Logging This Section Describes How to: Enable the Logging of Transactions From All Terminals Access and View Transactions From All Terminals This option enables you to automatically create a detailed log of terminal transactions each time a communication session is attempted or established between the Host PC and the terminals. This information is logged to a file named RAWMSG.TXT in the default TruTime directory, and can be viewed using any standard text editor. This file includes the date, time, Location, and raw transaction data (unaltered communications consisting of numbers and number codes) from each terminal. This option is enabled by selecting the Settings command in the Options menu, placing a check in the Raw Messages checkbox, and clicking on the OK button. Removing the check and clicking on the OK button will disable (default setting) the logging of Raw Messages TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

276 Auto Processing The Auto Processing utility is located in the Communications menu and is used to automatically poll MTX and Non-ACI data collection terminals, generate reports, and perform database backups at prescheduled times of the day and days of the week. The schedules utilized by the Auto Processing utility are created in the following modules: MTX Terminals: MTX Polling/Download Schedule module located in the Communications tab of the File Maintenance menu. Non-ACI: The Polling/Download Schedule window of the Non-ACI Terminals Polling/Download module. Auto Report Setup: These schedules are created in the Auto Report Setup module, located in the Communications tab. Backup Schedule: Backup schedules are created in the Schedule Backup dialog box. This dialog box is accessed by selecting the Create Backup Schedule command in the Options menu of the TruTime Backup module. When a schedule is executed, the Auto Processing utility begins to run the schedules, and a message will appear, displaying its status and operation. All operations conducted by this utility are recorded into the Log File (COMMMSG.LOG). Viewing the Polling Schedule: To view the day s polling schedule from the Auto Polling Message window, click on the Polling Icon in the upper left hand corner of the window. From the pull-down menu, select View Today s List. This will open a window displaying the Auto Polling Schedule for that day. To exit this window, click on the Close button. Minimizing the Auto Poll Message Window: To minimize the Auto Processing utility window, click on the Hide button. Terminating the Auto Poll Utility: To terminate the Auto Processing utility, click on the Exit button in the pull down menu. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-67

277 MTX Auto Polling/Download Schedule This Section Describes How to: Create an Auto Poll/Download Schedule for MTX Terminals Assign an Auto Poll/Download Schedule to MTX Terminals Delete an Auto Poll/Download Schedule for MTX Terminals Edit an Auto Poll/Download Schedule for MTX Terminals View an Auto Poll/Download Schedule for MTX Terminals The MTX Auto Poll/Download Schedule module allows you to create schedules to automatically poll or download information to MTX terminals by Location. Schedules can be created to poll or download to a single terminal, multiple terminals, or all terminals in a given Location twice daily on specified days of the week. Creating a Schedule: To create a schedule, perform the following: 1. Click on the Add button. 2. In the Schedule Name field, type in a name for the schedule. 3. In the Polling Time group box, select or enter the following: Polling Time 1 and 2: The time of the day, in 24 hour time format, that you want to poll/download to the terminals. Poll/Download: Select the operation. If download is selected, check the items to be downloaded in the Download Info group. Days of the Week: Place a check next to the day of the week that this schedule will be enabled. 4. To save the schedule, click on the Save button TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

278 Assigning Schedules to Terminals: Perform the following to assign terminals to a schedule: 1. Select a Location from the Location Name drop down list that contains the terminals that you want to assign a schedule. The terminals in the Location that can be assigned to a schedule will be displayed in the Available Terminals list. 2. Select the schedule you want to assign from the Available Schedules drop down list. 3. Highlight the terminals in the Available Terminals list that you want to assign the schedule to and click on the <ADD button. To select the entire list, click on the <<All button. To deselect terminals, highlight the desired terminals in the Selected Terminals list and click on the ADD> button. To deselect the entire list, click on the All>>button. 4. Click on the Assign button. This will assign the currently displayed schedule in the Available Schedules drop down list to the terminals in the Selected Terminals list. 5. Click on the Run button to load the schedule into and run the Auto Process module, or, click on the close button to exit the Auto Polling/Download Schedule window. Deleting a Schedule: To delete a Polling or Download Schedule, select the desired schedule from the Schedule Name field, and select the Delete button. This will automatically unassign the schedule from selected terminals. Editing a Schedule: To edit a Polling or Download Schedule, select the desired schedule from the Schedule Name field, and make your changes. To save your changes, click on the Save button. Viewing a Schedule: To view an MTX Polling/Download Schedule in the Auto Process module: 1. Click on the Auto Process icon in the title bar of the Auto Process module. 2. From the pull down menu, select the View Today s Non-ACI Terminal Polling Schedule option. 3. A window will appear displaying the schedules to be run and their time(s). To close this window, click on the Cancel button. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-69

279 Non-ACI Polling/Download Schedule This Section Describes How to: Create an Automatic Polling or Download Schedule Assigning Terminals to an Automatic Polling or Download Schedule Deleting an Automatic Polling or Download Schedule Editing an Automatic Polling or Download Schedule Viewing an Automatic Polling or Download Schedule Schedule Operation The Non-ACI Polling/Download Schedule enables you to create schedules for automatic terminal polling or download. These schedules are used by the Auto Process module to automatically retrieve data from or download to terminals at predetermined times. To access this feature, select the Polling/Download Schedule command in the File menu or toolbar of the Non-ACI Terminals Polling/Download module. Creating a Schedule: To create a schedule, perform the following: 1. Click on the Add button. 2. In the Schedule Name field, enter a name. 3. In the Schedule Options group box, select or enter the following: Polling Time 1 and 2: The time of the day, in 24 hour time format, that you want to poll/download to the terminals. This time is enabled by placing a check in the Active checkbox. Poll/Download: Select the operation. If download is selected, check the items to be downloaded in the Download Options TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

280 Days of the Week: Place a check next to the day of the week that this schedule will be enabled. 4. To save the schedule, click on the Update button. This will enable Add, Edit, Delete, Close, and Terminals buttons. 5. To exit this dialog box, click on the Close button. Assigning Terminals: Perform the following to assign terminals to a schedule: 1. Create a Schedule. 2. Click on the Terminals button to access the Polling/Download Schedule Terminal Assignments window. 3. From the drop down lists, select the Schedule and Location of the terminals that it will be assigned to. The terminals in the Location that can be assigned to a Schedule will be displayed in the Available Terminals list. 4. Select a terminal or group of terminals that will be assigned to the Schedule from the Available Terminals list. The assigned terminals will be displayed in the Selected Terminals list. 5. Click on the OK button to save your selections. 6. Click on the Close button to exit the Polling/Download Schedule dialog box. Deleting a Schedule: To delete a Polling or Download Schedule, select the desired schedule from the Schedule Name field in the Polling/Download Schedule dialog box and select the Delete button. A schedule cannot be deleted if it has terminal assignments. You must remove the terminal assignments from the schedule in the Polling/Download Schedule Terminal Assignments window. If the Schedule has no terminal assignments, a dialog box will appear to confirm the deletion. Click on the OK button to clear this message. Editing a Schedule: To edit a Polling or Download Schedule, select the desired schedule from the Schedule Name field in the Polling/Download Schedule dialog box and click on the Edit button. Schedule Terminal Assignments are modified in the Polling/Download Schedule Terminal Assignments window. To save your changes, click on the Update button. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-71

281 Viewing a Schedule: To view the Non-ACI Polling/Download Schedule in the Auto Process module: 1. Click on the Auto Process icon in the title bar of the Auto Process module. 2. From the pull down menu, select the View Today s Non-ACI Terminal Polling Schedule option. 3. A window will appear displaying the schedules to be run and their time(s). To close this window, click on the Cancel button. Schedule Operation: When the Auto Process module executes the schedule, the non-aci module will momentarily appear on screen along with a message indicating the type of action being performed TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

282 Auto Report Setup This Section Describes How to: Create an Automatic Report Schedule View Scheduled Reports The Auto Report Setup module is located in the Communications tab and allows you to automatically generate reports at predetermined times and days of the week. Once scheduled, these reports are run through the Auto Process module and can be sent to a printer or saved to a file. Creating an Automatic Polling or Download Schedule: To schedule a report to run when the Auto Process is executed, perform the following: 1. Click on the Auto Report Setup menu option in the Communications tab. 2. The Auto Process dialog box will appear. 3. Click on the Add Report button or select the Add Report command from the Edit menu. This will enable a new row and allow you to select a report name from the report drop down list. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-73

283 4. Select the day of the week that the report will run on by placing a check in the appropriate column. Then enter the time in the time field that the report will run on each day. 5. To set the date range for the report, click on the Date Range button. The Date Range dialog box will appear. The Date Range dialog box requires the following information: Start Period: This field represents the time frame for which the report will be generated. Using the drop down list, select the Current Pay Period, Previous Pay Period, Today, Yesterday, Current Week, Last Week, or a Date Range of your own choosing. Pay Class: When you select the Current Pay or the Previous Pay Period as the Start Period, the Pay Class drop down list is enabled. A Pay Class must be selected to generate the report. Send Report To: This allows you to send the report to either a printer or a file. Format: If you are saving the report to a file, this drop down list allows you to select the file format that you want to save it in. Once you have selected the date range options for the report, click on the OK button to return to the Auto Process dialog box TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

284 6. To select a range of employees for the report, click on the Range button. This will allow you to filter out employees to be included in the report by Cost Center, Department, Job Class, Pay Class, and individual employee. Once a selection is made, click on the OK button to return to the Auto Process dialog box. 7. To select a sorting sequence for the report, click on the Sort Sequence button. This will allow you to sort and group the report by three keys. Click on the OK button to return to the Auto Process dialog box after your selections are made. Select the sort sequence keys using the drop down list, the Page Break options, and then click on the OK button to return to the Auto Process dialog box. 8. If you are printing the report, you can set the Report Options by clicking on the Report Options button. This enables you to print hours only, dollars only, or both hours and dollars. Select an option and click on the OK button to return to the Auto Process dialog box. 9. Once all the reports have been setup, click on the Save button to save the report setup information, and exit the Auto Process dialog box. To generate the reports, you will need to run the Auto Process module. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-75

285 View Scheduled Reports: To view the scheduled reports in the Auto Process module, perform the following: 1. Click on the Auto Process icon in the title bar of the Auto Process module. 2. From the pull down menu, select the View Today s Report List option. 3. A window will appear displaying the report(s) to be run and scheduled time(s). To close this window, click on the Cancel button TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

286 Backup Schedule This Section Describes How to: Create a Schedule for Unattended TruTime Backups Editing a Schedule for Unattended TruTime Backups Deleting a Schedule for Unattended TruTime Backups View a Schedule for Unattended TruTime Backups TruTime Backup has the capability of creating unattended backups based on a backup schedule. The schedule can be set to perform a backup twice a day on each day of the week. Once created, this backup schedule is executed through the Auto Process module. Creating a Schedule: Backup schedules are created in the Schedule Backup dialog box. The Schedule Backup dialog box is used to enter times and days to perform an unattended backup. This dialog box is accessed by selecting the Create Backup Schedule command in the Options menu of the TruTime Backup module. Create a Backup Schedule To create a Backup Schedule, perform the following: 1. Enter the TruTime Backup and select the Create Backup command from the Options menu. The Schedule Backup dialog box will appear. 2. Click on the Add button. This will clear and enable all fields. 3. Enter a name for the schedule in the Schedule Name field. 4. In the Backup Time 1 field enter the first time of the day, in 24 hour time format, that you want to perform the backup. This time is only valid if a check is placed in the adjacent check box. 5. In the Backup Time 2 field enter the second time of the day, in 24 hour time format, that you want to perform the backup. This time is only valid if a check is placed in the adjacent check box. 6. Place a check next to each day of the week that you want the schedule to run. 7. In the Settings field, enter in the drive and directory location or click on the Browse button next to the field to select where you want the backup to be saved to. When the backup is performed, the backup file with the name format MMDDYYYYHHMM.ZIP will be created. 8. Click on the Update button to save the schedule. 9. Repeat these steps to add additional schedules or click on the Close button to exit the Schedule Backup dialog box. 10. Exit the TruTime Backup module. The Auto Process module will be updated. When the criteria for each schedule is met, the backup will be executed. TRUTIME / TruTime Communications 8-77

287 Editing a Schedule: To edit or modify a schedule, select a schedule from the Schedule Name field and click on the Edit button. Changes are saved by clicking on the Update button. Delete a Schedule: To delete a schedule, select a schedule from the Schedule Name field and click on the Delete button. A confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on Yes to delete the schedule. Changes are saved by clicking on the Update button. View a Schedule: To view the scheduled reports in the Auto Process module, perform the following: 1. Click on the Auto Process icon in the title bar of the Auto Process module. 2. From the pull down menu, select the View Today s Backup Schedule option. 3. A window will appear displaying the backups to be run and scheduled time(s). To close this window, click on the Cancel button TRUTIME / TruTime Communications

288 Chapter 9: Payroll Interfaces A Payroll Interface File can be generated by TruTime for use with a number of payroll services. The directory, file name, and format of this file is determined by the payroll service used. Over 75 payroll services are currently available. For a complete list of available payroll services and a payroll interface setup guide, please refer to our FTP site (FTP.Amano.com/TruTime/Documents/Payroll) for the latest information. The Payroll Interface File settings are defined in the System Configuration, Pay Code, Pay Class, and Employee Master, which are located in the File Maintenance tab. The Payroll Interface File is created in the Payroll Interface window, located in the Data Processing tab. This Chapter Includes: Payroll Company: Used to select the payroll service you are using. Payroll File Name: Used to define where the payroll export file will be created. Payroll Field ID: This field, located in the Pay Code window, is used by a payroll service to identify the Pay Code. The format for the Payroll Field ID is determined by the selected payroll service. Company Code: This field, located in the Basic Item tab of the Pay Class window, is used by a payroll service to identify the Pay Class. The format for this field is determined by the selected payroll service. Payroll ID Number: This field, located in the Basic Item tab of the Employee Master, is used by a payroll service to identify each employee. Each Payroll ID Number must be unique, and is assigned by the selected payroll service. Payroll Interface: Enables you to create the Payroll Interface Report or Export file by selecting desired Pay Classes and Pay Periods. TRUTIME / Payroll Interfaces 9-1

289 Payroll Company and Payroll File Name Payroll Company and Payroll File Name settings are both entered under the System Configuration module of the File Maintenance tab. Payroll Company: From the drop down list, select the name of the payroll service you are using. If the name of the service you are using does not appear in the list, please contact your certified TruTime dealer. Payroll File Name: The directory, file name and format is determined by the payroll service used. ADP: Directory: PCPERS File name: EXTPAYxx.ccc, where xx is a user defined file ID. File Extension:.ccc, where ccc is the Company Code, which must be entered in each Pay Class. Example: C:\PCPERS \EXTPAY TRUTIME / Payroll Interfaces

290 Payroll Field ID Payroll Field ID: This field, located in the Pay Code window, is used by a payroll service to identify the Pay Code. The format for the Payroll Field ID is determined by the selected payroll service. This Payroll Field ID is only seen by the payroll service and does not appear on reports. This ID must be correct in order for the payroll export file to be created. If you need assistance, please contact your payroll service. ADP: ADP uses Payroll Field ID s that are predetermined and represent certain types of pay. They are: 12 is always regular hours 13 is always overtime hours (1.50) 16 and 17 are any other hours (vacation, sick, holiday, bereavement, etc.) 18 and 19 are any other hours (vacation, sick, holiday, bereavement, etc) These ID s are to be entered with a zero prefix. For example, 12 should be entered as 012. In addition, ID s 16 thru 19 may have a suffix of up two letters to identify the Pay Code assigned to those types of hours. Prior to assigning TruTime Pay Codes your ADP representative must define all Pay Code Field ID's that will be active within the ADP system. TRUTIME / Payroll Interfaces 9-3

291 Company Code The Company Code field, located in the Basic Item tab of the Pay Class window, is used by a payroll service to identify the Pay Class. The format for this field is determined by the payroll service used. ADP: Three digit Code assigned by ADP equals the TruTime Company Code. 9-4 TRUTIME / Payroll Interfaces

292 Payroll ID Number The Payroll ID Number, located in the Basic Item tab of the Employee Master, is used by a payroll service to identify each employee. Each number must be unique, and is assigned by the payroll service used. ADP: A six digit code, which if not assigned by ADP, TruTime will use the first six characters of the Employee number to create the payroll export file. In this case Izzy Nikaido s Payroll ID would be TRUTIME / Payroll Interfaces 9-5

293 Payroll Interface This Section Describes How To: Create a Payroll Interface File Print a Payroll Interface Report The Payroll Interface window is used to create a Payroll Interface Report or Export file containing employee from selected Pay Classes and information. Once created, this file can be used to import employee hours into a payroll service s software. To Create A Payroll Interface File: To create a Payroll Interface file, perform the following: 1. Select the Payroll Interface menu item in the Data Processing tab. 2. In the Payroll Interface window, select the Pay Classes that you want to include in the file. 3. Select the Pay Period Setting. The choices are; Previous, Current, or Advanced. If Advanced is selected, the following dialog box will appear: 4. If Advanced is selected enter the Pay Period from the Range drop down list (Current Pay Period, Previous Pay Period, Today, Yesterday, Current Week, Last Week, and Date Range). If you select Date Range, you must enter the Start and End Dates of the range, or select Until and enter in an End Date. Once you have finished, click on the OK button. 5. In the Payroll Interface window, select the Make Payroll Data command from the File menu or click on the Calculator button. 9-6 TRUTIME / Payroll Interfaces

294 Printing a Payroll Interface Report: To print a Payroll Interface Report, perform the following: 1. Select the Payroll Interface menu item in the Data Processing tab. 2. In the Payroll Interface window, select the Pay Classes that you want to include in the file. 3. Select the Pay Period Setting. The choices are; Previous, Current, or Advanced. 4. If Advanced is selected enter the Pay Period from the Range drop down list (Current Pay Period, Previous Pay Period, Today, Yesterday, Current Week, Last Week, and Date Range). If you select Date Range, you must enter the Start and End Dates of the range, or select Until and enter in an End Date. Once you have finished, click on the OK button. 5. Click on the Printer button on the toolbar. Viewing a Payroll Interface Report: To view a Payroll Interface Report, perform the following: 1. Select the Payroll Interface menu item in the Data Processing tab. 2. In the Payroll Interface window, select the Pay Classes that you want to include in the file. 3. Select the Pay Period Setting. The choices are; Previous, Current, or Advanced. 4. If Advanced is selected enter the Pay Period from the Range drop down list (Current Pay Period, Previous Pay Period, Today, Yesterday, Current Week, Last Week, and Date Range). If you select Date Range, you must enter the Start and End Dates of the range, or select Until and enter in an End Date. Once you have finished, click on the OK button. 5. Click on the Monitor button next to the Printer button on the toolbar. TRUTIME / Payroll Interfaces 9-7

295 9-8 TRUTIME / Payroll Interfaces

296 Chapter 10: TruTime Backup This chapter explains how to perform operations within TruTime Backup including; backing up and restoring database files, creating an automatic backup schedule and archiving selected sections of the database to minimize space and optimize system performance. All operations described in this chapter are performed through the Database Maintenance window. This window is accessed by selecting the TruTime Backup; located in the TruTime for Windows folder under the Programs group of the Start menu. TruTime Backup is a self contained application that requires exclusive access to TruTime data files. To ensure access no users should be logged on to TruTime, and Auto Processing should be disabled. If access can not be obtained, an error message will be displayed. This Chapter Includes: Backup: Allows you to backup all TruTime database files to a network or local drive. Restore: Allows you to restore all or selected TruTime database tables from a previous backup. Merge: Allows you to merge data from an archive into the current database. Archive: Allows you to copy or move sections of the current TruTime database, within a user defined date range, to a network or local drive. This feature also allows you restore archived data to a selected directory for the purpose of viewing historical data. Unarchive: Only active after an archived file has been restored; this option returns all TruTime settings from the archived files to the active (original) TruTime files. TRUTIME / TruTime Backup 10-1

297 Backup This Section Describes How to: Backup the TruTime Database to a Local or Network Drive. Before beginning it is recommended that a TruTime Backup folder be created, either on the local or network drive, to store the backup file. Once the backup module is open there is no ability to create a new folder. The Backup command creates a backup Zip file of the TruTime database that is fully compatible with PKZip, WinZip, and other Zip archive utilities. To backup your TruTime database, click on the Backup button or select the Backup command from the Options menu in the Database Maintenance window. The Backup dialog box will appear. Name: Enter a name for the backup data file. File names must be unique. If the file name entered already exists, a warning will appear prompting you to overwrite the existing file. Caution should be used before overwriting an existing backup file. Once a file is over written, you will not be able to recover it. Clicking on Yes will overwrite the file, clicking No will return you to the Backup dialog box, were a different file name can be assigned. Store In: Enter the directory path to store the backup data file. This directory must exist prior to starting this process. If it is a network directory, you must have read/write access for the backup procedure to run. You can also select the directory using the Browse button. This is the recommended method to avoid errors. Clicking on the Browse button will cause a standard Windows Select Folder dialog box to appear. Select the directory or folder by clicking on its name and clicking on the OK button. Clicking the Cancel button will cancel this operation TRUTIME / TruTime Backup

298 Once the Name and Store In fields have been entered, click on the Backup button to start the backup procedure. If the file name and directory are valid, the backup procedure will begin. A warning dialog box will appear to remind you that the procedure may take some time to finish. Click on the Yes button to continue the backup. If the No button is selected, the operation will terminate. A dialog box will appear displaying the progress for the current file being backed up as well as the progress for the entire backup. To cancel the operation, click the Cancel button on the progress dialog box. This will cancel the entire backup procedure. WARNING! If the backup procedure is interrupted by the user or because of accidental computer shutdown, the integrity of the backup file cannot be guaranteed. In the event that this occurs, it is recommended that you create a new backup file of your data. If the backup was cancelled in the progress dialog box, a notification dialog box will appear. Click on OK to acknowledge the message. The message will disappear and the progress dialog box will reappear displaying the backup s progress when it was cancelled. To exit this dialog box, click on the Close button. TRUTIME / TruTime Backup 10-3

299 Restore This Section Describes How to: Restore TruTime Database Backup Files The Restore command is used to restore a previously backed up database to the current system. To restore a backup, click on the Restore icon in the Database Maintenance window. A Restore dialog box will appear. This dialog box is divided into two separate group boxes, one that lists the Database Tables and the other for each table Description. The Database Tables group box is used to select the data that you wish to restore. Each group contains individual tables. The default and recommended setting is to restore all groups from the backup file. Restoring partial tables may, under certain situations, corrupt the links within your database. When a group is highlighted, the Description box will display the type of tables that belong to that particular group. To view a list of individual tables, select a group in the Database Tables group box and click on the Select button. A list of tables contained in the selected group will be displayed. A description of the current table will appear in the Description group box. To return to the Data Tables group box, click on the Return button TRUTIME / TruTime Backup

300 When you are ready to restore your database tables, click on the Restore button. A standard Windows select file dialog box will appear. Using the drop down list, select the directory that contains the file you want to restore. Select the file and click Open. This will start the database restoration. Selecting the Cancel button will cancel this operation. A dialog box will display the current file being restored as well as the progress of the entire database restoration. When the database is completely restored, the progress dialog box will disappear. If you wish to cancel the restoration, click the Cancel button in the progress dialog box. WARNING! If the restoration is interrupted either by the user or because of accidental computer shutdown, the integrity of the restored file cannot be guaranteed. If this occurs, it is recommended that you restore a new file from the backup. If the database restoration was cancelled in the progress dialog box, a notification dialog box will appear. Click on OK to acknowledge this message. The message will disappear and the progress dialog box will reappear displaying the restoration s progress up to the point of cancellation. To exit this dialog box, click on the Close button. TRUTIME / TruTime Backup 10-5

301 Merge This Section Describes How to: Merge Archived Database Files with the Current Database. The TruTime Merge Utility merges archived database files into the current TruTime database. This feature enables employee data from another TruTime database to be appended to the current database. The TruTime Merge Utility can be used to provide reporting and to generate payroll export files for companies who do not have access to a wide-area network, or where speed limitations of the wide-area network limits the usability of TruTime. The Merge Utility is not designed to replace a wide-area network, but to provide one-way communication processing similar to batch oriented systems. In order for the utility to work correctly the following guidelines must be followed: 1. Consistent Naming Convention In order be consistent, all Cost Center, Department, Job Class and Pay Classes, and Pay Codes must be the same for all locations. For example, if Job Class #1 is Part Assembly at one location, then it must be for all locations. 2. Archiving Correctly The archive files must be created correctly and on a regular basis. Archives should be done at the end of each pay period after all data is verified for accuracy. If inaccuracies occur, they must be corrected at the local site. The corporate locations can make edits, but those edits will be overwritten if the range of data is re-merged, and should not be sent to the local sites. 3. Unique Badge and Employee Numbers All Badge and Employee Numbers across all locations must be unique. If the same Badge Numbers are merged from different locations, an error message will appear when attempting to merge an archive. If a duplicate Employee Number exits, both employee punches will be merged into one employee. 4. Employees Working In Multiple Locations If an employee works at multiple locations, that employee must perform an all transfer operation at the clock if the punch is to be stored into TruTime correctly. 5. Modifications to the System All modifications made at branch locations take precedence over any changes made by corporate. The software assumes that the branch modifications are the most recent and accurate. To merge a previously archived database file with the current TruTime database, click on the Merge button in the Database Maintenance window. The Merge Data Archive dialog box will appear. Enter the name and the path of the archived database file to be merged in the Archive Name text box or select the file name and path using the Browse button TRUTIME / TruTime Backup

302 Clicking on the Browse button will cause a standard Windows select file dialog box to appear: Using the drop down list, select the directory that contains the file you want to archive. Select the file and click on Open. The file name and its directory path will automatically appear in the Archive Name text box. Once an archived file name and directory path have been entered in the Archive Name text box, click on the Merge button to start the merge process. A dialog box will display the current file being merged into the database as well as the progress of the entire process. When the merge process is completed, the progress dialog box will disappear. If you wish to cancel the merge, click the Cancel button in the progress dialog box. WARNING!If the restoration is interrupted either by the user or because of accidental computer shutdown, the integrity of the merged database cannot be guaranteed. If this occurs, it is recommended that you restart the merge. If the database restoration was cancelled in the progress dialog box, a notification dialog box will appear. Click on OK to acknowledge this message. The message will disappear and the progress dialog box will reappear displaying the operation s progress up to the point of cancellation. To exit this dialog box, click on the Close button. TRUTIME / TruTime Backup 10-7

303 Archive This Section Describes How to: Create an Archive of TruTime Database Files Restore Archived TruTime Database Files for Viewing and Reports Unarchive (Activate) the Current TruTime Database TruTime s Archive utility consists of the following: Archive: This feature allows you to archive (copy) or move sections of the current TruTime database to a network or local drive. Before beginning it is recommended a folder called TruTime Archive be create on the local drive to store the archive file. Once the backup module is open there is no ability to create a new folder. Once a section of the database is removed, it is no longer part of the current database. Restore Archive: This enables an archived section of the database to be read by TruTime. The restored database is separate from the current database and is read only. You can, however view hours, punches, and generate all standard TruTime reports. Unarchive: The Unarchive command returns control of TruTime to the current database after operations have been performed with a restored archive. Creating an Archive: To create an archive, click on the archive icon or select the Archive command from the Options menu in the Database Maintenance window. The Archive TruTime Database dialog box will appear. It consists of two parts, the Archive Data and Restore Archive tabs. The Archive Data tab is used to create an archive. The Restore Archive tab is used to restore an archive so that it can be read by TruTime. The Archive Data tab requires the following: Name: Enter in a name for the Archive data file. Folder: Enter the directory path to store the data file. This directory must exist. If it is a network directory, you must have read/write access for the archive procedure to run properly TRUTIME / TruTime Backup

304 You can also select the directory path using the Browse button. This is recommended to avoid errors. Clicking on the Browse button will cause a standard Windows Select Folder dialog box to appear. Select the directory or folder by clicking on it s name and then click on OK. Selecting Cancel will cancel this operation. Enter the Date Range: Start Date: Using the drop down list, enter the date for the range of data that is to be archived. The default value for this field is the current system date. End Date: Using the drop down list, enter the end date for the range of data that is to be archived. The default value for this field is the current system date. Delete: Click on this checkbox if you want to remove the specified data from the current database into an archived zip file on a network or local drive. Once a section of the database is removed and archived, it can only be accessed by unarchiving the file. When all the fields are entered, click on the Start button to proceed with the archive process. If the archive file already exists, a warning dialog box will appear. TRUTIME / TruTime Backup 10-9

305 Click on the Yes button to overwrite the existing file and proceed with the process, or select the No button to cancel the operation. If a check was placed in the Delete checkbox, a dialog box will appear confirming your selection. The options for this dialog box are as follows: Yes: TruTime will remove the specified date range data from the database and store it to the specified file in the name field. No: TruTime will copy, but not remove the specified date range data from the database and store it to the specified file in the name field. Cancel: This command will cancel the entire operation. Once the archive process begins, a dialog box will be displayed showing the progress for the current file being archived as well as the progress for the entire backup. When the archive operation is complete, the progress dialog box will disappear. If you wish to cancel the archive operation, click the Cancel button in the progress dialog box. If the operation is interrupted either by the user or because of accidental computer shutdown, the integrity of the archived file cannot be guaranteed. If this occurs, it is recommended that you archive a new archive file. If the archive operation was cancelled in the progress dialog box, a notification dialog box will appear. To acknowledge this message, click on OK. The message will disappear and the progress dialog box will appear displaying the archive s progress up to the point of cancellation. To exit this dialog box, click on the Close button TRUTIME / TruTime Backup

306 Restoring an Archive Copied or moved archived database files are restored through the Restore Archive tab. Since these files were removed from the database, they cannot be read by TruTime in their current state and are separate from the current database. This option allows you to view these files and generate all standard TruTime reports. The Restore Archive tab is accessed by selecting the Archive button in the Database Maintenance window and clicking on the Restore Archive tab in the Archive dialog box. The Restore Archive tab consists of the Restore Archive From and Restore Database To fields. The Restore Archive From field requires the following: Name: Enter in a name for the data file. Folder: Enter the directory path to store the data file. This directory must exist prior to starting this process. If it is a network directory, you must have read/write access for the procedure to run properly. You can also select the directory using the Browse button. This is the recommended method to avoid errors. Clicking on the Browse button will cause a standard Windows Select Folder dialog box to appear. Select the directory or folder by clicking on its name and selecting the OK button. Selecting Cancel will cancel this operation. TRUTIME / TruTime Backup 10-11

307 The Restore Database To field requires a directory path to temporarily store the database file. You can also select the directory path using the Browse button. This is the recommended method to avoid errors. WARNING! This directory cannot be the current TruTime directory. If it is, the archived database will replace the current TruTime database. Once both windows are completely filled out, click on the Start button to restore the database. After the archive is restored, TruTime will default every module to read only. This is done because restored archived data cannot be modified. You can, however, view hours, punches, and run all standard TruTime reports. When you are done using this archive you must restore the active TruTime database to return the system to normal operation. The next section describes how to restore the active TruTime database. Unarchive This command returns control of TruTime to the current database after an archive has been restored. To execute this command, select the Unarchive button or select the Unarchive command from the Options menu in the Database Maintenance window TRUTIME / TruTime Backup

308 Chapter 11: TruTime Utility The TruTime Utility consists of five tools that enable you to perform a variety of tasks from database conversion to calculating the memory usage of an MTX terminal. The tools are; Database Conversion for 5.0, Compact Database for 5.0, Reset the Number of Clients, Insert Program to TruTime Menu, and Calculate MTX Memory Usage. This Chapter Includes: Data Conversion for 5.0: Upgrades the database from any previous versions of TruTime to version 5.0. Compact Database for 5.0: Compacts the database files to optimize disk space on a local or network drive. Reset the Number of Clients: Allows you to reset the number of users accessing TruTime. Insert Program to TruTime Menu: Allows you to add other program so that they can be run from within a selected TruTime menu tab. Calculate MTX Memory Usage: Allows you to check the potential memory use of any MTX terminal. TRUTIME / TruTime Utility 11-1

309 Data Conversion for 5.0 This Section Describes How to: Install the TruTime Utility Upgrade the TruTime Database to Version 5.0 Install the TruTime Utility 1. Backup all of *.btr and *.ddf files to a separate directory or zip file. 2. Insert the TruTime for Windows CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 3. When the TruTime installation screen appears, check only TruTime Utility, and follow the onscreen instructions. Upgrade the TruTime Database to Version 5.0 If you are upgrading to TruTime 5.0 from an older version, then you must perform the following: Warning! This process requires three times the amount of disk space of the current database. If you are unsure about your system s ability to handle the operation, please contact your system administrator. 1. Run the TruTime Utility from the Start Menu and click on the Data Conversion for Ver 5.0 selection. The Data Conversion for 5.0 dialog box will appear displaying the path of the source, backup and conversion database file; the disk space required for the conversion; and the currently available disk space on your system. 2. Click on OK to start the data conversion. The conversion process will begin with a database file check. 3. You will then be prompted to copy the converted database into the Apps\TruTime directory. Click on the Yes button to proceed TRUTIME / TruTime Utility

310 4. During the process, a progress dialog box will be displayed for each phase of the conversion. The entire process can be cancelled by clicking on the Cancel button in either of the progress dialog boxes. 5. When the database conversion is complete, a confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the OK button to confirm the message. Should we add steps to install and apply converted files. Once complete, you can begin to use TruTime. TRUTIME / TruTime Utility 11-3

311 Compacting the Database for 5.0 This Section Describes How to: Compact the TruTime Database The Compact Database for 5.0 feature is used to minimize the space required by the database on your system and optimize performance. It is recommened that you perform this operation after an Archive file has been created where the data has been deleted. To compact the database, perform the following: Warning! This process requires three times the amount of disk space of the current database. If you are unsure about your system s ability to handle the operation, please consult you system administrator. 1. Run the TruTime Utility from the Start Menu and select the Compact Database for 5.0 option. A confirm operation dialog box will appear. 2. Click on OK to start the operation. A dialog box will appear displaying the path of the source database file, path of the backup and compacted database file; the disk space required for the operation; and the currently available disk space on your system. 3. Click on the OK button to proceed, or Cancel to quit the operation. During each phase of the process a progress dialog box will be displayed. To cancel the process, click on the Cancel button. 4. When the process is complete, a confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on the OK button TRUTIME / TruTime Utility

312 Resetting the Number of Clients This Section Describes How to: Reset the Number of Users Logged into TruTime In the event of a Hard Coded Network User Limit error message, the number of clients (users) logged in to TruTime must be reset to zero. This must be performed when no users are logged into TruTime. To do so, run the TruTime Utility and select the Reset Number of Clients option. A login screen will appear. Enter 6569 in the Enter Password field and click OK. A confirmation dialog box will appear if the number of clients was reset. Click on OK to close this dialog box. TRUTIME / TruTime Utility 11-5

313 Inserting Other Programs Into TruTime Menus This Section Describes How to: Insert and Run Other Applications From Within TruTime The Insert Program to TruTime Menu option enables you to add and run other applications through TruTime s menus. In addition, the program can be assigned access privileges. Refer to Chapter 5, TruTime Access, for information on assigning access privileges. To add an application to one of the TruTime menus, perform the following: 1. Using the Run command line, open the au0000.ini file. The au0000.ini file will appear. Scroll down to the Menu tab that you wish to place the program in. Menu tabs are designated in the au0000.ini file with the corresponding TruTime Menu tab name in brackets [ ] TRUTIME / TruTime Utility

314 2. The programs in each Menu tab group are entered in the order that they appear in the TruTime menu. At the last line of the Menu tab group, type in the program number, path, and name of the program as you want it to appear in the TruTime menu. For example: program number = path,program name Program12 = C:\windows\explorer.exe,Explorer Once the information has been entered, save and exit the au0000.ini file. 3. Run the TruTime Utility from the Start Menu and select the Insert Program to TruTime Menu option. The following dialog box will appear. 4. Enter in the program name (one to eight characters) in the Program Name text box and its description in the Description text box. Click on OK when finished. If the insertion was successful, a confirmation dialog box will appear. Click on OK to acknowledge this message: TRUTIME / TruTime Utility 11-7

315 5. To confirm the addition of the application, close the TruTime Utility, and open TruTime. Select the menu tab containing the application that was added. Double click on the menu item (program icon) to launch it TRUTIME / TruTime Utility

316 Calculating MTX Memory Usage This Section Describes How to: View the Memory Usage of an MTX Terminal Connected to TruTime The Calculate MTX Memory Usage window allows you to view and optimize the amount and type of information downloaded by TruTime to an MTX data collection terminal. Since the memory of an MTX terminal is fixed, this feature allows you to calculate memory required in the terminal to accept downloaded information, and the number of punches (transactions) that can be recorded. To do so, perform the following: 1. Run the TruTime Utility, and select the Calculate MTX Memory Usage option. A window will appear: 2. Select the options according to what you want to download and the type of terminal you have. 3. To calculate the required memory usage, click on the Calculate button. A dialog box will appear displaying the memory usage, and the number of punches (transactions) that can be recorded. TRUTIME / TruTime Utility 11-9

317 11-10 TRUTIME / TruTime Utility

318 Glossary Abbreviation: A shortened form of the description field used for reporting. Access Level: A number which references the table that defines the user's access to TruTime's features. An Access Level is assigned to each User ID and Password. Advance Schedule: Used to schedule employee days off up to ten years ahead of the Current Pay Period. This allows you to assign a Pay Code, number of hours to pay, Zone Code, and to specify a pay date. Alpha-numeric: This term is used to describe a field in which both alphabetic (1-9) and numeric (A-Z) characters may be input. Archiving: To archive (copy) or move sections of the current TruTime database, within a user specified date range, to a network or local drive. Audit Trail: This feature shows all edits made with Edit Daily Data and Global Edit Daily Data by storing the date/time, User ID, Employee Number, and original data in a file. This provides management with the capability of reviewing and verifying data edits. Auto Break: A Break/Lunch which is automatically deducted from an employee s schedule. Auto Mode: Enables the automatic polling function for a terminal group. Used with Amano clocks other than the MTX. Auto Processing for MTX: This function activates the MTX terminal Auto Processing (Polling) memory resident application. Automatic Pay: This feature enables the Pay Code to automatically generate hours for time not physically worked. Typical types of Pay Codes are: Holiday, Vacation, Sick and Personal. Auto Reports: This module allows you to schedule reports to run at specific times during the day which can be sent to either a printer or a disk. Auto Schedule: This feature allows TruTime to automatically apply Template Schedule parameters based on the employee's first IN punch. The actual IN punch is compared to the closest start time of available Template Schedules and is applied. Auto Update: Automatically add an MTX terminal connection to TruTime to the terminal list box. Backup: This feature creates Zip (data compression) files of the TruTime database that are fully compatible with many Zip archive utilities that are available. Backward: This option will report on dates that are prior to the Starting On date for the selected reporting period. Badge Number: This number is used for data capture at a terminal which is used by TruTime. Each employee must be assigned a Badge Number to generate data at the terminal. Base Rate: Yearly salary of the employee, or the employee s hourly rate. TRUTIME / Glossary G - 1

319 Baud Rate: The communication speed setting between the terminal and TruTime. Benefit Time: This is an ongoing record containing the amount of Benefit Time which an employee has taken and accumulated. This feature can be used to track Benefit Time for five different Pay Codes. Bi-Weekly: A Pay Period which typically repeats every 14 days. Break: Approved time not worked which occurs during scheduled work time. It may be paid or unpaid. Build: The version of TruTime executable software you are running on your system. Also known as Build Number. Callback: An employee who has just completed a work schedule and is requested to also work another schedule or part of another schedule. The employee may also be on standby time and called into work Clear Options: This command resets all user defined download options to the software default options. Clock Maintenance: This module allows the user to setup the communication/programming parameters for each clock and to set up clock groups for polling and downloading information. Consecutive Count Reset: This feature will reset the Consecutive Day Overtime to zero. The resetting of the Consecutive Day can be based on the start of the Pay Period or on a specific day of the week. Consecutive Day Overtime: This feature is used to assign a certain Pay Code to an employee's worked day when he/she has exceeded a specified number of consecutive days worked. Continuous: Considered when work is performed uninterrupted from start to finish. It is not considered if a break or any IN/OUT punches occur. Cost Center: A way of grouping employees, that is used to categorize the distribution of labor hours and wages for accounting and reporting purposes. It is the highest level of tiering. Daily Minimum Paid Hours: Allows you to specify a minimum number of hours to pay an employee if an employee punches IN. If their total punched hours are less than those of the minimum hours amount, the minimum amount of hours will be paid. Daily OT Level: The number of hours an employee must exceed in a day before the Daily OT (Overtime) Pay Code will be used in the calculation of hours. Date Range: A selected time interval. Day Change Override: A unit of time attached to the last IN punch before Day Change Time. It is used to adjust hours. Day Change Time: The time of day that your normal business day ends. Daylight Savings Time (DST): A regularly scheduled (usually twice per year) method of changing time in order to artificially expand the daylight hours in a region. Deduct Hours: Used to specify how many hours will be automatically deducted from an employee's daily hours for a break or lunch. The deduction of hours will only occur when the employee reaches the minimum amount of hours worked within a Flex Zone. G - 2 TRUTIME / Glossary

320 Default Schedule: Applying a Template Schedule to an employee that does not have an Auto or Individual Schedule assigned to them. Department: A way of grouping employees, which is used to categorize the distribution of labor hours for accounting and reporting purposes. It is the middle level of tiering. Dollars: Refers to a parameter option in reports, Employee Master, and Job Class. Reports can be generated in dollars as long as the Wage/Rate tab in Employee Master has been set up. Download: Allows you to transfer information from TruTime to the data collection terminal(s). Edit Daily Data: This module is used to adjust hours and view the employees punch date and times, labor distribution categories and accumulated hours. Edit Undefined Data: This allows you to edit any clock data that is unrecognizable by TruTime. Eligible Date: This date marks the period from which an employee will be able to accumulate Benefit Time within a specified Pay Code. Employee Master: Maintains information about each employee using an employee number. This employee number, once assigned, cannot be changed or used again. If this number must be changed you will need to delete the entire employee and re-enter the data. End: Parameter specified to determine how an employee's hours will be accumulated when he/she works between two zones. End Time: The expected completion time of an employee Schedule. The scheduled End Time is compared to an employee OUT punch for the generation of exception codes. Exception Code: A code that appears with any punch that does not match with the employee schedule. Export: This feature is used to transfer data from TruTime to another software or package for analysis purposes. Field: An area on a form where data may be entered or edited. First IN: This setting controls how an employee's hours will be accumulated when they work in two zones. This will assign the employee's hours to the zone in which the first IN punch occurred. Fixed Lunch End: The scheduled End Time for a fixed lunch deduction. Fixed Lunch Start: The scheduled Start Time for a fixed lunch deduction. Flex Zone: Time Zones set for TruTime to recognize the scheduled start time for an Auto Break/Lunch deduction. Any punches within these zones will be identified as a Break/Lunch by TruTime. Forward: This option will report on dates that are after the Starting On date for the selected reporting period. Function Code: This field represents the key that is pressed on a terminal during keyboard operation. Some Function Codes are: Department, Cost Center and Job Class transfers, and hours entry. TRUTIME / Glossary G - 3

321 Global: Applies a schedule or Edit Daily Data to all employees within a set range. Grace: This feature allows you to specify a length of time before or after the IN and/or OUT times (or Break/Lunch times) that the employee's actual time will be adjusted. This feature prevents exceptions from appearing on reports for those employees who do not punch on the exact Start and End Times. Grace always gives time to the employee. Group: This feature allows you to classify employees with similar pay policies and general work schedules, as well as designate the specific terminal where employees may punch in and out. Group Edit: This option allows the user to delete clocks from clock Groups. Group Set: This option allows the user to add a clock Group. Hours Adjustment: Allows user to make manual changes to employee hours in Edit Daily Data module. Hours to Pay: The number of hours which an employee will automatically receive for a particular holiday. Import: This feature allows the user to transfer data into TruTime from an external source. IN: The action of recording the time of one's arrival or beginning work. (See also Punch IN) Inactive Status: An option setting for an individual who you want no longer recognized as an employee by TruTime. Individual Schedule: Allows the user to schedule an employee for the Rounding of punches, setting Auto Break, and assigning labor distribution fields. Insert Punch: Adds a cell in the entry screen between two punches to allow manual input of a punch in TruTime. IP (Internet Protocol): Defines addressing, routing and handling of data blocks over a network. Job Class: A form of grouping employees, which is used to categorize the distribution of labor hours for accounting and reporting purposes. It is the lowest level of tiering. Lockout Schedule: This function is incorporated with the MTX terminals, Auto or Individual Schedule. It creates time zones that will allow or restrict employees from being able to swipe the terminal. Log File: Stores communication events between TruTime and the terminals. Lunch: A period of time normally lasting between 30 to 60 minutes, occurring after a specified number of hours worked. It may be paid or unpaid. Majority: This setting determines how an employee's hours will be accumulated when they work in multiple zones. This feature will assign hours to the zone in which the most hours have been worked. Manpower: The total number of employees working and scheduled for standby time. Manual Polling: This option allows the user to poll (upload) data from the terminal to TruTime on request, not just at a regularly scheduled interval. G - 4 TRUTIME / Glossary

322 Merging: Appending the TruTime database with previously archived data files. Minimum Hours Worked: This field will specify the least hours an employee must work before an Auto Break deduction will occur. Also, employees must reach this threshold before punches will be considered as a Break/Lunch deduction in a Flex Zone. Multiplier: Used by some payroll services to calculate wages and dollars. It is used in conjunction with the Wage/Rate function of TruTime. Non-Continuous: Considered when work is performed interrupted from start to finish. It is considered if a break or any IN/OUT punches occur. Non-Work Hours: Time when an employee is considered not on the job. Order Number: This field allows you to set up a list order of the Pay Codes when they are viewed in the entry box, list boxes and printed on the reports. This setting has no effect on any calculations. OT Level: This feature allows you to set up Daily Overtime conditions in each of the Pay Codes. Each Pay Code can tier to three other Pay Codes. OT Reset Mode: This feature allows you to reset Overtime Hours back to zero. Automatic Overtime Reset can be based on the day of the week or the first day of the pay period. OUT: The action of recording the time of one's departure or leaving work. (See also Punch OUT) Output: Sending the payroll interface data to the screen, file or a printer. Overtime: Time worked in excess of a set limit. Paid As Punch (PAP): Allows the user to override the Grace/Revision Rounding. Parameter: A value entered into a field. Patch: A fix to a program. Pay Class: This feature establishes all of the pay policies for a particular group of employees. Some of the Pay Classes include: Rounding, type of Pay Period, and Overtime. Pay Code: This feature categorizes hours an employee can receive as pay. The categories are defined either as worked or non-worked hours. Pay In Advance: This feature allows you to assign the hours to be paid in the Pay Period before the actual time off occurs, or in the same Pay Period as the time off will be taken. Payroll Field ID: This field is used to associate hours generated for a Pay Code with the correct Field Identifier for a payroll service code. Payroll ID: Used to assign a payroll identification number to an employee. The Payroll Identification Number associates the hours in a payroll transfer file with an employee in the payroll service company's database. Payroll Interface: Used to import employee hours into a payroll company s software. TRUTIME / Glossary G - 5

323 Pay Period: The span of time that represents the company's pay cycle. Typical Pay Periods are Weekly, Bi-weekly, Semi-monthly, and Monthly. Personal Identification Number (PIN or Pin #): A numeric code that a user enters to identify themselves from others in TruTime. Point: A numeric value used for rounding. It represents the time at which an employee s punch will be rounded forward to the next unit. Polling: The process of data transfer from the terminal to TruTime. It is the opposite of downloading. Polling Times: Assigns the times that TruTime will automatically poll the terminals. Profile: The criteria used to set parameters in the Time Distribution Report and TruScheduler. Punch Data: Allows you to view and modify current punch information data in TruTime. Punch IN: The action of recording the time of one's arrival or beginning work. In TruTime this is done through MTX terminals, hand recognition, PC Punch, etc. Punch OUT: The action of recording the time of one's departure or leaving work. In TruTime this is done through MTX terminals, hand recognition, PC Punch, etc. Qualifier: Used to determine if a Pay Code will be considered, such as you must Work (the) Day Before in order to receive Holiday Pay. Range: Specifies the starting and ending dates to report or view information. Rate: Yearly salary of the employee, or the employee s hourly rate. (Also see Base Rate) Recalculate Hours: Allows you to recompute employee hours based on their Pay Class, schedule, and daily punches. Relays: A weekly schedule of days, times, and durations that a relay circuit will be activated. Relay Setup: Allows for a Relay Schedule to be created and assigned to an MTX terminal. Restore: Used to recover a previously backed up database to the current system. Rounding: The process of adding or subtracting minutes to a punch time for the purpose of calculating employee hours. Schedule Rotation: Allows you to specify the number of Pay Periods to rotate. Scheduled Off Hours: The number of hours an employee is scheduled "off" before a punch is considered for a second schedule. If the number of hours between an OUT punch and the next IN punch is less than the number entered here, the off hours will be viewed as a break and the worked hours will be viewed as the same schedule. If the number of hours between an OUT punch and the next IN punch is more than the number entered here, the worked hours will be viewed as two separate schedules. Serial Number: The unique number identifying the licensed copy of TruTime you have installed. G - 6 TRUTIME / Glossary

324 Set/Update Clock Parameters: Allows the user to configure the programming parameters for each clock. Sort: Organizes information in a specified order for reporting and viewing. Split: Defines how an employee's hours will be accumulated when they work in two zones. Split Hours: Hours that can be taken away from one hour type and assigned to another. Standby (Schedule): This term refers to an employee who is available to be called in to work if needed. The employee usually works a normal shift and then stays at home on "standby" status. Start Time: The scheduled time that an employee is to report to work. Start Time is compared to an employee's IN punch for the generation of exception codes. System Access: Assigns access privileges to the different modules in TruTime. Also is used by the Audit Trail function to determine which user performed employee edits. System Configuration: Defines how employee hours will be categorized and output. This information is used to generate reports, file transfers and setup payroll services. Template Schedule: Used to set up commonly used work schedules so they can be assigned to multiple employees. Terminal: A device (such as an MTX) which allows input of data which can be communicated to TruTime. Tiering: Determines how TruTime will calculate overtime. The calculation of overtime from one Pay Code to another is the actual process of tiering. TruAccruals: An optional module which allows TruTime to track benefits, vacation, holiday, and sick time. TruScheduler: This module permits the user to create and apply employee schedules. Many of the features in Individual and Advanced Schedules are included and simplified in this module. TIP: A gratuity received by an employee from a patron for services performed. UnArchive: Returns TruTime to its original state after the user has restored and viewed archived data. Unit: A numeric value used to adjust employee punches to a consistent measurement of time. User ID: An assigned code used to gain entry into the TruTime system. It is used in conjunction with a User Password. User Password: An assigned code used to gain entry into the TruTime system. It is used in conjunction with a User ID. Validation: The process of downloading employee data to clocks so that the clocks recognize the employees when they punch. Version: The edition number of the Trutime software you have installed. Wage/Rate: Yearly salary of the employee, or the employee s hourly rate. TRUTIME / Glossary G - 7

325 Work Day After: Qualifier option that an employee must work the day following a Holiday in order to receive Holiday Pay. Work Day Before: Qualifier option that an employee must work the day prior to a Holiday in order to receive Holiday Pay. Zone Code: This number is used to categorize a time period in which an employee may work. Zone Code Decision Type: This feature determines how hours will be accumulated by a zone when an employee works between multiple zones. Zone Differential: The act of splitting the day into different sections (zones). G - 8 TRUTIME / Glossary

326 TruTime 6.00 User s Guide ATT Copyright 2003 Printed in U.S.A. 03/03/125

888 534-5994 Time Guardian Version 4.0 USER MANUAL

888 534-5994 Time Guardian Version 4.0 USER MANUAL 888 534-5994 Time Guardian Version 4.0 USER MANUAL AMANO Time Guardian Time and Attendance System Version 4.0 User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 1: Introduction...1-1 Features and Requirements...1-1

More information

User s Guide. Table of Contents

User s Guide. Table of Contents 09/2009 User s Guide Table of Contents Getting Started 01. Logging In 1.1 Changing Login Name and Password 02. Entering Upgrade Codes Setting Up Your System Establishing Communication 03. Adding Clock

More information

Exeba -ATS. User Guide. Escan Technologies Corporation

Exeba -ATS. User Guide. Escan Technologies Corporation Escan Technologies Corporation Exeba -ATS User Guide Escan Technologies Corp. 12140 Severn Way Riverside, CA 92503 Phone (909) 270-0043 Fax (909) 270-0920 1 ESCAN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION Exeba -ATS User

More information

Time Guardian Series. Installation and User Guide

Time Guardian Series. Installation and User Guide Time Guardian Series Installation and User Guide Thank you For purchasing another fine product from Amano Cincinnati, Inc. This User Guide covers the following Amano Time Guardian Series software; Time

More information

Contents. Quick Start Steps 1. Welcome to PayClock 3. Product Overview 8. Routine Operations Guide 17

Contents. Quick Start Steps 1. Welcome to PayClock 3. Product Overview 8. Routine Operations Guide 17 User's Guide Contents Quick Start Steps 1 Verify the Contents...1 Mount the Terminal (PC600 and FaceIN Only)...1 Verify the System Requirements...1 Install the PayClock Software...2 Open PayClock...2

More information

WhatsUp Gold v16.2 Installation and Configuration Guide

WhatsUp Gold v16.2 Installation and Configuration Guide WhatsUp Gold v16.2 Installation and Configuration Guide Contents Installing and Configuring Ipswitch WhatsUp Gold v16.2 using WhatsUp Setup Installing WhatsUp Gold using WhatsUp Setup... 1 Security guidelines

More information

A0 Time & Attendance. Management System. Software Manual

A0 Time & Attendance. Management System. Software Manual A0 Time & Attendance Management System Software Manual Application: Fingerprint terminal, Fingerprint access control terminal, Fingerprint terminal with access control and visible walky-talky system, IC/ID

More information

FAS Asset Accounting FAS CIP Accounting FAS Asset Inventory SQL Server Installation & Administration Guide Version 2011.1

FAS Asset Accounting FAS CIP Accounting FAS Asset Inventory SQL Server Installation & Administration Guide Version 2011.1 FAS Asset Accounting FAS CIP Accounting FAS Asset Inventory SQL Server Installation & Administration Guide Version 2011.1 2011 Sage Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Published by Sage 2325 Dulles Corner

More information

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS...

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS... Contents INTRODUCTION... 1 BillQuick HR Setup Checklist... 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS... 3 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS... 3 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS... 3 Operating System Requirements... 3 Other System Requirements...

More information

GUARD1 PLUS SE Administrator's Manual

GUARD1 PLUS SE Administrator's Manual GUARD1 PLUS SE Administrator's Manual Version 4.4 30700 Bainbridge Road Solon, Ohio 44139 Phone 216-595-0890 Fax 216-595-0991 [email protected] www.guard1.com i 2010 TimeKeeping Systems, Inc. GUARD1 PLUS

More information

Introduction 1-1 Installing FAS 500 Asset Accounting the First Time 2-1 Installing FAS 500 Asset Accounting: Upgrading from a Prior Version 3-1

Introduction 1-1 Installing FAS 500 Asset Accounting the First Time 2-1 Installing FAS 500 Asset Accounting: Upgrading from a Prior Version 3-1 Contents 1. Introduction 1-1 Supported Operating Environments................ 1-1 System Requirements............................. 1-2 Security Requirements........................ 1-3 Installing Server

More information

Crystal Reports Installation Guide

Crystal Reports Installation Guide Crystal Reports Installation Guide Version XI Infor Global Solutions, Inc. Copyright 2006 Infor IP Holdings C.V. and/or its affiliates or licensors. All rights reserved. The Infor word and design marks

More information

Getting More From TimeVue User Guide. Includes Getting More From TimeVue Lite and Getting More From TimeVue Full

Getting More From TimeVue User Guide. Includes Getting More From TimeVue Lite and Getting More From TimeVue Full Getting More From TimeVue User Guide Includes Getting More From TimeVue Lite and Getting More From TimeVue Full 1 Table of Contents Table of Contents... 2 Getting More From TimeVue Introduction... 3 More

More information

TimeValue Software Due Date Tracking and Task Management Software

TimeValue Software Due Date Tracking and Task Management Software User s Guide TM TimeValue Software Due Date Tracking and Task Management Software File In Time Software User s Guide Copyright TimeValue Software, Inc. (a California Corporation) 1992-2010. All rights

More information

WhatsUp Gold v16.1 Installation and Configuration Guide

WhatsUp Gold v16.1 Installation and Configuration Guide WhatsUp Gold v16.1 Installation and Configuration Guide Contents Installing and Configuring Ipswitch WhatsUp Gold v16.1 using WhatsUp Setup Installing WhatsUp Gold using WhatsUp Setup... 1 Security guidelines

More information

MGC WebCommander Web Server Manager

MGC WebCommander Web Server Manager MGC WebCommander Web Server Manager Installation and Configuration Guide Version 8.0 Copyright 2006 Polycom, Inc. All Rights Reserved Catalog No. DOC2138B Version 8.0 Proprietary and Confidential The information

More information

TimeClock Plus User s Guide

TimeClock Plus User s Guide TimeClock Plus User s Guide Publication No. EL1016-02 Publication Date: November 2007 This manual contains reference information about software products from Activant Solutions Inc. The software described

More information

File Management Utility. T u t o r i a l

File Management Utility. T u t o r i a l File Management Utility T u t o r i a l Contents System Requirements... 2 Preparing Files for Transfer to GlobalMark... 2 Application Launch... 2 Printer Setup... 2 Communication Status... 4 Communication

More information

Time & Attendance Supervisor Basics for ADP Workforce Now. Automatic Data Processing, LLC ES Canada

Time & Attendance Supervisor Basics for ADP Workforce Now. Automatic Data Processing, LLC ES Canada Time & Attendance Supervisor Basics for ADP Workforce Now Automatic Data Processing, LLC ES Canada ADP s Trademarks The ADP Logo, ADP, ADP Workforce Now and IN THE BUSINESS OF YOUR SUCCESS are registered

More information

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks. 2012 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks. 2012 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable for any problems arising from

More information

GENESIS PRO User s Guide 2009

GENESIS PRO User s Guide 2009 GENESIS PRO User s Guide 2009 Read This First Welcome Welcome to Time America s Genesis Pro User s Guide. This manual is shipped with each new Genesis Pro software package and is intended solely for use

More information

TASKE Call Center Management Tools

TASKE Call Center Management Tools TASKE Call Center Management Tools Version 7 Integrating and Configuring Blue Pumpkin PrimeTime and PrimeTime Skills TASKE Technology Inc. Copyright 2000, TASKE Technology Inc. All rights reserved. Printed

More information

Automation License Manager

Automation License Manager s Contents Product Overview 1 Installation 2 Working with the Automation License Manager 3 Glossary Manual Index 12/2008 A5E02389428-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices

More information

Attix5 Pro Server Edition

Attix5 Pro Server Edition Attix5 Pro Server Edition V7.0.2 User Manual for Mac OS X Your guide to protecting data with Attix5 Pro Server Edition. Copyright notice and proprietary information All rights reserved. Attix5, 2013 Trademarks

More information

iw Document Manager Cabinet Converter User s Guide

iw Document Manager Cabinet Converter User s Guide iw Document Manager Cabinet Converter User s Guide Contents Contents.................................................................... 1 Abbreviations Used in This Guide................................................

More information

Installation Instruction STATISTICA Enterprise Small Business

Installation Instruction STATISTICA Enterprise Small Business Installation Instruction STATISTICA Enterprise Small Business Notes: ❶ The installation of STATISTICA Enterprise Small Business entails two parts: a) a server installation, and b) workstation installations

More information

Stellar Phoenix. SQL Database Repair 6.0. Installation Guide

Stellar Phoenix. SQL Database Repair 6.0. Installation Guide Stellar Phoenix SQL Database Repair 6.0 Installation Guide Overview Stellar Phoenix SQL Database Repair software is an easy to use application designed to repair corrupt or damaged Microsoft SQL Server

More information

STATISTICA VERSION 9 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE WITH TERMINAL SERVER

STATISTICA VERSION 9 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE WITH TERMINAL SERVER Notes: STATISTICA VERSION 9 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE WITH TERMINAL SERVER 1. These instructions focus on installation on Windows Terminal Server (WTS), but are applicable

More information

DriveRight. Fleet Management Software. Getting Started Guide. CarChip. DriveRight. Drivers. Vehicles. Product #8186

DriveRight. Fleet Management Software. Getting Started Guide. CarChip. DriveRight. Drivers. Vehicles. Product #8186 DriveRight Fleet Management Software Getting Started Guide CarChip DriveRight Drivers Vehicles Product #8186 DriveRight Fleet Management Software Getting Started Guide; P/N 8186 Davis Instruments Part

More information

SOS Suite Installation Guide

SOS Suite Installation Guide SOS Suite Installation Guide rev. 8/31/2010 Contents Overview Upgrading from SOS 2009 and Older Pre-Installation Recommendations Network Installations System Requirements Preparing for Installation Installing

More information

BillQuick HR Getting Started Guide2015

BillQuick HR Getting Started Guide2015 GETTING STARTED GUIDE: BillQuick HR 2015 BillQuick HR Getting Started Guide2015 BillQuick Power Up Your Business (866) 945-1595 www.bqe.com [email protected] GETTING STARTED GUIDE: BillQuick HR 2015 Contents

More information

email-lead Grabber Business 2010 User Guide

email-lead Grabber Business 2010 User Guide email-lead Grabber Business 2010 User Guide Copyright and Trademark Information in this documentation is subject to change without notice. The software described in this manual is furnished under a license

More information

GE Healthcare Life Sciences UNICORN 5.31. Administration and Technical Manual

GE Healthcare Life Sciences UNICORN 5.31. Administration and Technical Manual GE Healthcare Life Sciences UNICORN 5.31 Administration and Technical Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Network setup... 1.1 Network terms and concepts... 1.2 Network environment... 1.3 UNICORN

More information

StrikeRisk v6.0 IEC/EN 62305-2 Risk Management Software Getting Started

StrikeRisk v6.0 IEC/EN 62305-2 Risk Management Software Getting Started StrikeRisk v6.0 IEC/EN 62305-2 Risk Management Software Getting Started Contents StrikeRisk v6.0 Introduction 1/1 1 Installing StrikeRisk System requirements Installing StrikeRisk Installation troubleshooting

More information

Installation Instructions Release Version 15.0 January 30 th, 2011

Installation Instructions Release Version 15.0 January 30 th, 2011 Release Version 15.0 January 30 th, 2011 ARGUS Software: ARGUS Valuation - DCF The contents of this document are considered proprietary by ARGUS Software, the information enclosed and any portion thereof

More information

Database Administration Guide

Database Administration Guide Database Administration Guide 013008 2008 Blackbaud, Inc. This publication, or any part thereof, may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying,

More information

Elo 1725L 17 Touch Screen Monitor Installation Guide. Product Name: Elo 1725L 17- inch Monitor

Elo 1725L 17 Touch Screen Monitor Installation Guide. Product Name: Elo 1725L 17- inch Monitor Elo 1725L 17 Touch Screen Monitor Installation Guide Product Name: Elo 1725L 17- inch Monitor 0621407 Copyright 2007 McKesson Corporation. All rights reserved. This documentation is an unpublished work

More information

NDA-30141 ISSUE 1 STOCK # 200893. CallCenterWorX-Enterprise IMX MAT Quick Reference Guide MAY, 2000. NEC America, Inc.

NDA-30141 ISSUE 1 STOCK # 200893. CallCenterWorX-Enterprise IMX MAT Quick Reference Guide MAY, 2000. NEC America, Inc. NDA-30141 ISSUE 1 STOCK # 200893 CallCenterWorX-Enterprise IMX MAT Quick Reference Guide MAY, 2000 NEC America, Inc. LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications,

More information

Viive 5.0 INSTALLATION AND SETUP GUIDE 1-855-MAC-VIIVE

Viive 5.0 INSTALLATION AND SETUP GUIDE 1-855-MAC-VIIVE Viive 5.0 INSTALLATION AND SETUP GUIDE 1-855-MAC-VIIVE ii Contents PUBLICATION DATE February 2015 COPYRIGHT 2015 Henry Schein, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,

More information

Accounts Production Installation Guide

Accounts Production Installation Guide Accounts Production Installation Guide Copyright statement Sage (UK) Limited and Sage Hibernia Limited, 2014. All rights reserved. If this documentation includes advice or information relating to any matter

More information

Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS 1991-2009 LEAD Technologies, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS 1991-2009 LEAD Technologies, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Installation Guide Lenel OnGuard 2009 Installation Guide, product version 6.3. This guide is item number DOC-110, revision 1.038, May 2009 Copyright 1992-2009 Lenel Systems International, Inc. Information

More information

How To Write Tvalue Amortization Software

How To Write Tvalue Amortization Software TimeValue Software Amortization Software Version 5 User s Guide s o f t w a r e User's Guide TimeValue Software Amortization Software Version 5 ii s o f t w a r e ii TValue Amortization Software, Version

More information

The following items are trademarks or registered trademarks of Kaba Mas in the United States and/or other countries. GITCON

The following items are trademarks or registered trademarks of Kaba Mas in the United States and/or other countries. GITCON The Gitcon Access Management Software Installation Guide is a publication of Kaba Mas LLC (hereinafter Kaba Mas). No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic

More information

Using SQL Reporting Services with Amicus

Using SQL Reporting Services with Amicus Using SQL Reporting Services with Amicus Applies to: Amicus Attorney Premium Edition 2011 SP1 Amicus Premium Billing 2011 Contents About SQL Server Reporting Services...2 What you need 2 Setting up SQL

More information

Installation Instruction STATISTICA Enterprise Server

Installation Instruction STATISTICA Enterprise Server Installation Instruction STATISTICA Enterprise Server Notes: ❶ The installation of STATISTICA Enterprise Server entails two parts: a) a server installation, and b) workstation installations on each of

More information

NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide

NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable

More information

Attix5 Pro Server Edition

Attix5 Pro Server Edition Attix5 Pro Server Edition V7.0.3 User Manual for Linux and Unix operating systems Your guide to protecting data with Attix5 Pro Server Edition. Copyright notice and proprietary information All rights reserved.

More information

Time & Expense Entry WalkThrough

Time & Expense Entry WalkThrough PRACTICE CS Time & Expense Entry WalkThrough Version 2014.x.x TL 27573a (01/16/2015) Copyright Information Text copyright 2004-2015 by Thomson Reuters. All rights reserved. Video display images copyright

More information

DocAve 6 Service Pack 1 Job Monitor

DocAve 6 Service Pack 1 Job Monitor DocAve 6 Service Pack 1 Job Monitor Reference Guide Revision C Issued September 2012 1 Table of Contents About Job Monitor... 4 Submitting Documentation Feedback to AvePoint... 4 Before You Begin... 5

More information

Paychex Time and Labor Online User s Guide

Paychex Time and Labor Online User s Guide Paychex Time and Labor Online User s Guide This manual is the property of Paychex, Inc. and should never be removed from the office premises without the manager's express permission. Copyright 2014 Paychex,

More information

Centran Version 4 Getting Started Guide KABA MAS. Table Of Contents

Centran Version 4 Getting Started Guide KABA MAS. Table Of Contents Page 1 Centran Version 4 Getting Started Guide KABA MAS Kaba Mas Welcome Kaba Mas, part of the world-wide Kaba group, is the world's leading manufacturer and supplier of high security, electronic safe

More information

Welcome to ComputerEase 10.0

Welcome to ComputerEase 10.0 Welcome to ComputerEase 10.0 This manual is designed to walk you through basic functions by ComputerEase Software, Inc. This manual will be a useful tool as you explore ComputerEase. If you have upgraded

More information

BillQuick Agent 2010 Getting Started Guide

BillQuick Agent 2010 Getting Started Guide Time Billing and Project Management Software Built With Your Industry Knowledge BillQuick Agent 2010 Getting Started Guide BQE Software, Inc. 2601 Airport Drive Suite 380 Torrance CA 90505 Support: (310)

More information

TimeSaver for Hourly Timesheet Employees

TimeSaver for Hourly Timesheet Employees Hourly Timesheet Employees TIMESAVER FOR HOURLY TIMESHEET EMPLOYEES Table of Contents GETTING STARTED LOG-ON AND NAVIGATION... 3 LOGGING ON TO TIMESAVER... 3 INTRODUCING TIMESAVER... 5 USING FULL SCREEN

More information

User Manual for Web. Help Desk Authority 9.0

User Manual for Web. Help Desk Authority 9.0 User Manual for Web Help Desk Authority 9.0 2011ScriptLogic Corporation ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. ScriptLogic, the ScriptLogic logo and Point,Click,Done! are trademarks and registered trademarks of ScriptLogic

More information

Embarcadero Performance Center 2.7 Installation Guide

Embarcadero Performance Center 2.7 Installation Guide Embarcadero Performance Center 2.7 Installation Guide Copyright 1994-2009 Embarcadero Technologies, Inc. Embarcadero Technologies, Inc. 100 California Street, 12th Floor San Francisco, CA 94111 U.S.A.

More information

How To Set Up Total Recall Web On A Microsoft Memorybook 2.5.2.2 (For A Microtron)

How To Set Up Total Recall Web On A Microsoft Memorybook 2.5.2.2 (For A Microtron) Total Recall Web Web Module Manual and Customer Quick Reference Guides COPYRIGHT NOTICE Copyright 1994-2009 by DHS Associates, Inc. All Rights Reserved. All TOTAL RECALL, TOTAL RECALL SQL, TOTAL RECALL

More information

Kaspersky Password Manager

Kaspersky Password Manager Kaspersky Password Manager User Guide Dear User, Thank you for choosing our product. We hope that you will find this documentation useful and that it will provide answers to most questions that may arise.

More information

STATISTICA VERSION 12 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE SMALL BUSINESS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

STATISTICA VERSION 12 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE SMALL BUSINESS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS STATISTICA VERSION 12 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE SMALL BUSINESS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS Notes 1. The installation of STATISTICA Enterprise Small Business entails two parts: a) a server installation, and b)

More information

ATVS. Amano Time Validation System. Installation and Operation Guide. Enterprise Edition Version 4.2

ATVS. Amano Time Validation System. Installation and Operation Guide. Enterprise Edition Version 4.2 ATVS Amano Time Validation System Installation and Operation Guide Enterprise Edition Version 4.2 Thank you for purchasing another fine product from Amano Cincinnati, Inc. Proprietary Notice This document

More information

VERITAS Backup Exec TM 10.0 for Windows Servers

VERITAS Backup Exec TM 10.0 for Windows Servers VERITAS Backup Exec TM 10.0 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide N134418 July 2004 Disclaimer The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice. VERITAS Software

More information

PayClock Pro Time and Attendance Software Version 5

PayClock Pro Time and Attendance Software Version 5 PayClock Pro Time and Attendance Software Version 5 Setup and Users Guide Important Notice Please carefully read the PayClock Pro Version 5 Installation Guide before inserting this CD and beginning the

More information

VERITAS Backup Exec 9.1 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide

VERITAS Backup Exec 9.1 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide VERITAS Backup Exec 9.1 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide N109548 Disclaimer The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice. VERITAS Software Corporation makes

More information

Database Administration Guide

Database Administration Guide Database Administration Guide 092211 2011 Blackbaud, Inc. This publication, or any part thereof, may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying,

More information

User Guide. DocAve Lotus Notes Migrator for Microsoft Exchange 1.1. Using the DocAve Notes Migrator for Exchange to Perform a Basic Migration

User Guide. DocAve Lotus Notes Migrator for Microsoft Exchange 1.1. Using the DocAve Notes Migrator for Exchange to Perform a Basic Migration User Guide DocAve Lotus Notes Migrator for Microsoft Exchange 1.1 Using the DocAve Notes Migrator for Exchange to Perform a Basic Migration This document is intended for anyone wishing to familiarize themselves

More information

Bosch ReadykeyPRO Unlimited Installation Guide, product version 6.5. This guide is item number DOC-110-2-029, revision 2.029, May 2012.

Bosch ReadykeyPRO Unlimited Installation Guide, product version 6.5. This guide is item number DOC-110-2-029, revision 2.029, May 2012. Bosch ReadykeyPRO Unlimited Installation Guide, product version 6.5. This guide is item number DOC-110-2-029, revision 2.029, May 2012. Copyright 1995-2012 Lenel Systems International, Inc. Information

More information

HAHTsite IDE and IP Installation Guide

HAHTsite IDE and IP Installation Guide HAHTsite IDE and IP Installation Guide IDE and IP Installation Guide release 4.0 Notice Copyright 1999 HAHT Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved May 1999 MN01-C-00-400-00 No part of this publication may

More information

Getting Started with Vision 6

Getting Started with Vision 6 Getting Started with Vision 6 Version 6.9 Notice Copyright 1981-2009 Netop Business Solutions A/S. All Rights Reserved. Portions used under license from third parties. Please send any comments to: Netop

More information

Network Scanner Tool R3.1. User s Guide Version 3.0.04

Network Scanner Tool R3.1. User s Guide Version 3.0.04 Network Scanner Tool R3.1 User s Guide Version 3.0.04 Copyright 2000-2004 by Sharp Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited,

More information

020112 2008 Blackbaud, Inc. This publication, or any part thereof, may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, or

020112 2008 Blackbaud, Inc. This publication, or any part thereof, may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, or Point of Sale Guide 020112 2008 Blackbaud, Inc. This publication, or any part thereof, may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying,

More information

Follow these procedures for QuickBooks Direct or File Integration: Section 1: Direct QuickBooks Integration [Export, Import or Both]

Follow these procedures for QuickBooks Direct or File Integration: Section 1: Direct QuickBooks Integration [Export, Import or Both] Follow these procedures for QuickBooks Direct or File Integration: Section 1: Direct QuickBooks Integration [Export, Import or Both] Part A - Configuration Step 1. During installation of the Amano Time

More information

Instruction manual. testo easyheat Configuration and Analysis software

Instruction manual. testo easyheat Configuration and Analysis software Instruction manual testo easyheat Configuration and Analysis software en 2 General Information General Information This documentation includes important information about the features and application of

More information

ASTROW HR. Installation & Operation & Programming MANUAL

ASTROW HR. Installation & Operation & Programming MANUAL ASTROW HR Installation & Operation & Programming MANUAL 2007 A.S.E. R&D EUROPE. Printed in Belgium. All rights reserved. NOTICE Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does

More information

Attendance Rx User Guide

Attendance Rx User Guide Attendance Rx User Guide Welcome to Attendance Rx The Attendance Rx system allows the user to manage an entire company's time and attendance from a single Windows-based PC. Key Time and Attendance Features:

More information

National Fire Incident Reporting System (NFIRS 5.0) NFIRS Data Entry/Validation Tool Users Guide

National Fire Incident Reporting System (NFIRS 5.0) NFIRS Data Entry/Validation Tool Users Guide National Fire Incident Reporting System (NFIRS 5.0) NFIRS Data Entry/Validation Tool Users Guide NFIRS 5.0 Software Version 5.3 Prepared for: Directorate of Preparedness and Response (FEMA) Prepared by:

More information

Operating System Installation Guide

Operating System Installation Guide Operating System Installation Guide This guide provides instructions on the following: Installing the Windows Server 2008 operating systems on page 1 Installing the Windows Small Business Server 2011 operating

More information

How To Use Senior Systems Cloud Services

How To Use Senior Systems Cloud Services Senior Systems Cloud Services In this guide... Senior Systems Cloud Services 1 Cloud Services User Guide 2 Working In Your Cloud Environment 3 Cloud Profile Management Tool 6 How To Save Files 8 How To

More information

Getting Started with Ascent Xtrata 1.7

Getting Started with Ascent Xtrata 1.7 Getting Started with Ascent Xtrata 1.7 10300582-000 Revision A Copyright Copyright 2006 Kofax Image Products, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA. The information contained in this document is the

More information

Features - Microsoft Data Protection Manager

Features - Microsoft Data Protection Manager Page 1 of 63 Features - Microsoft Data Protection Manager TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - MICROSOFT DATA PROTECTION MANAGER INSTALLATION Install the Microsoft Data Protection Manager BACKUP

More information

Installation and Program Essentials

Installation and Program Essentials CS PROFESSIONAL SUITE ACCOUNTING PRODUCTS Installation and Program Essentials version 2015.x.x TL 28970 3/26/2015 Copyright Information Text copyright 1998 2015 by Thomson Reuters. All rights reserved.

More information

ezlabormanager for Supervisors Handout Manual

ezlabormanager for Supervisors Handout Manual ezlabormanager for Supervisors Handout Manual. V12291072195CANENG_EZ18 2010 ADP, Inc. ADP s Trademarks The ADP Logo and ezlabormanager are registered trademarks of ADP, Inc. Third-Party Trademarks Adobe,

More information

version 3.2 purchaseexpress quick step guide

version 3.2 purchaseexpress quick step guide version 3.2 purchaseexpress quick step guide Copyright 2009 by American Express. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any electronic or mechanical means,

More information

Installation & Maintenance Guide

Installation & Maintenance Guide The instruction booklet is also included on the CD in Word and Acrobat formats, which may be easier to print. (If you want to install Acrobat Reader run d:\acroread\setup.exe (where d:\ is the identifier

More information

PopupProtect User Guide

PopupProtect User Guide Having the power to block or allow popup and popunder advertising www.contentwatch.com 2004 All rights reserved. 2369 West Orton Circle, Salt Lake City, UT 84119 Table of Contents Welcome and Installation

More information

Fundraising 50. Installation Guide

Fundraising 50. Installation Guide This is a publication of Abila, Inc. Version 2014 2013 Abila, Inc. and its affiliated entities. All rights reserved. Abila, the Abila logos, and the Abila product and service names mentioned herein are

More information

Dell Statistica 13.0. Statistica Enterprise Installation Instructions

Dell Statistica 13.0. Statistica Enterprise Installation Instructions Dell Statistica 13.0 2015 Dell Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright. The software described in this guide is furnished under a software license or

More information

Microsoft Project Server 2010 Project Manager s Guide for Project Web App

Microsoft Project Server 2010 Project Manager s Guide for Project Web App Microsoft Project Server 2010 Project Manager s Guide for Project Web App Copyright This document is provided as-is. Information and views expressed in this document, including URL and other Internet Web

More information

Copyrights, Legal Notices, Trademarks and Servicemarks

Copyrights, Legal Notices, Trademarks and Servicemarks Installation Guide Copyrights, Legal Notices, Trademarks and Servicemarks Copyright 1998-2003 Westbrook Technologies Incorporated. All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or transmitted

More information

Nortel Networks Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide

Nortel Networks Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Nortel Networks Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide www.nortelnetworks.com 2001 Nortel Networks P0919439 Issue 07 (24) Table of contents How to use this guide... 5 Introduction...5 How this

More information

Utilities. 2003... ComCash

Utilities. 2003... ComCash Utilities ComCash Utilities All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or

More information

Setup and Configuration Guide for Pathways Mobile Estimating

Setup and Configuration Guide for Pathways Mobile Estimating Setup and Configuration Guide for Pathways Mobile Estimating Setup and Configuration Guide for Pathways Mobile Estimating Copyright 2008 by CCC Information Services Inc. All rights reserved. No part of

More information

Installation / Migration Guide for Windows 2000/2003 Servers

Installation / Migration Guide for Windows 2000/2003 Servers PSQL v9 SP1 (9.1) & Installation / Migration Guide for Windows 2000/2003 Servers Ebix, Inc. Corporate Headquarters Concourse Parkway, Suite 3200 Atlanta, GA 30328 USA Phone: 678-281-2020 Fax: 678-281-2019

More information

Sage DacEasy. Payroll User s Guide

Sage DacEasy. Payroll User s Guide Sage DacEasy 2012 Payroll User s Guide Sage DacEasy Payroll Copyright Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Company names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless

More information

WELCOME TO TIMECLOCK PLUS ONDEMAND (BASIC)!

WELCOME TO TIMECLOCK PLUS ONDEMAND (BASIC)! WELCOME TO TIMECLOCK PLUS ONDEMAND (BASIC)! To access the bookmarks go to View > Navigation Panels > Bookmarks. This Quick Reference Guide provides basic information to immediately start using TimeClock

More information

Time & Attendance Manager Basics

Time & Attendance Manager Basics Time & Attendance Manager Basics Handout Manual V03261272136EZ18CMB2 2012 ADP, Inc. ADP s Trademarks The ADP Logo, ADP Workforce Now, and ezlabormanager are registered trademarks of ADP, Inc. In the Business

More information

Symantec Backup Exec System Recovery Granular Restore Option User's Guide

Symantec Backup Exec System Recovery Granular Restore Option User's Guide Symantec Backup Exec System Recovery Granular Restore Option User's Guide Symantec Backup Exec System Recovery Granular Restore Option User's Guide The software described in this book is furnished under

More information

The United States Office Of Personnel Management eopf Human Resources Specialist Training Manual for eopf Version 4.0.

The United States Office Of Personnel Management eopf Human Resources Specialist Training Manual for eopf Version 4.0. The United States Office Of Personnel Management eopf Human Resources Specialist Training Manual for eopf Version 4.0. Copyright 1994-2007 by Northrop Grumman. All rights reserved. Northrop Grumman, the

More information

Installing the Microsoft Network Driver Interface

Installing the Microsoft Network Driver Interface Installing the Microsoft Network Driver Interface Overview This guide explains how to install the PictureTel Live200 Microsoft Network Driver Interface (NDIS) software you have downloaded from PictureTel's

More information

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks. Model supported by the KX printer driver. 2010 KYOCERA MITA Corporation

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks. Model supported by the KX printer driver. 2010 KYOCERA MITA Corporation Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change for improvement without notice. We cannot be held liable for any problems

More information